NTRP 3-07.2.

2

NAVY TACTICAL REFERENCE PUBLICATION

FORCE PROTECTION WEAPONS HANDLING STANDARD PROCEDURES AND GUIDELINES NTRP 3-07.2.2
EDITION AUG 2003
DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS

APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE; DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED.

0411LP1025324

PRIMARY REVIEW AUTHORITY: COMMANDER FLEET FORCES COMMAND

1

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

AUG 2003

2

NTRP 3-07.2.2

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

AUG 2003

4

2 August 2003 PUBLICATION NOTICE 1.NTRP 3-07. Summary: NTRP 3-07. FORCE PROTECTION WEAPONS HANDLING STANDARD PROCEDURES AND GUIDELINES. M14 and M16 (series) rifles.2 provides standardized handling procedures that are essential for the safe and effective employment of the M9 and M11 service pistols. NTRP 3-07. It is effective upon receipt.2.2 (AUG 2003). MK 3A2 concussion grenade.2. Navy. is available in the Navy Warfare Library. M2HB (. M203 and M79 grenade launchers.2. and simunitions. Note to Navy Warfare Library Custodian This notice should be duplicated for routing to cognizant personnel to keep them informed of changes to this publication. 2. M60 (series) and M240 (series) medium machine guns. MK19 (MOD 3) 40 mm grenade machine gun. 5 AUG 2003 . nonlethal weapons.50 caliber) heavy machine gun. Mossberg 500 shotgun.S. ROUTING Navy Warfare Library Custodian Navy Warfare Library publications must be made readily available to all users and other interested personnel within the U.

2.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 6 .NTRP 3-07.

2. and Date of Change Date of Entry Page Count Verified by (Signature) 7 AUG 2003 .NTRP 3-07.2 RECORD OF CHANGES Change No.

and Date of Change Date of Entry Page Count Verified by (Signature) AUG 2003 8 .2.2 RECORD OF CHANGES Change No.NTRP 3-07.

. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Weapon Condition Codes for the M9 Service Pistol. . . . . . . . AND CONTROLS 1. . . .3 2. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PROCEDURES. . . . Procedures to FIRE . . . .9 2. .5 SCOPE . . . . . . . 1-2 PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . SHOW CLEAR . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 M9 SERVICE PISTOL DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION .5 2. . . . . . . . . 1-2 GENERAL CLEARING BARREL PROCEDURES . .1 1. .3 2. . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . .1. 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-2 GUARD MOUNT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 M9 Service Pistol Technical Characteristics . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .6 2. . .2. . . . . . .1 2. .2 2. 2-9 Weapon Handling Commands for the M9 Service Pistol. . . Procedures to LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Introduction to Remedial Action . .1 2. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . Procedures to CEASE FIRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 CHAPTER 2 — M9 SERVICE PISTOL 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M9 SERVICE PISTOL ON THE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Inherent Safety Features of the M9 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . .6 2. . . . . . . . . . .3 1. . .3 1. . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 1 — INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS SAFETY. . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Weapons Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-12 2-13 2-13 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M9 SERVICE PISTOL AT THE CLEARING BARREL . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .3. . 2-14 9 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . Procedures to UNLOAD. . . .1. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . .7 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 2. . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2. . . . 2-1 Description of the M9 Service Pistol.2. . . . .1 1. 2-14 LOAD AND MAKE READY Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M9 Service Pistol . .5 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 WEAPONS SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 1. General Weapon Condition Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures to LOAD AND MAKE READY .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures to UNLOAD . .1. . . .2 Force Protection Weapons Handling Standard Procedures and Guidelines CONTENTS Page No. . . . . .2 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 M9 Service Pistol Associated Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 M9 Service Pistol Major Components . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. Procedures to MAKE READY . . . . . . 2-4 Cycle of Operation for the M9 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . 3-10 Procedures to LOAD AND MAKE READY . . Unload/Reload . . . . AND RELOADING THE M9 SERVICE PISTOL Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . . .5 3. . . . . . 3-1 3-1 3-2 3-2 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-5 3-9 3-9 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M11 SERVICE PISTOL ON THE RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the M11 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . HOLSTERING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Show Clear Transfer for the M11 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . 3-11 Procedures to FIRE . . . . . . . . 2-16 Show Clear Transfer for the M9 Service Pistol. . . . . . . . .1. . . 3-11 Procedures to CEASE FIRE .4. . . . . . . 2-16 M9 SERVICE PISTOL SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES . . 3-9 Procedures to MAKE READY . . .4. . . .3 3. . .2 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M11 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 3. . . . . .2. . .7 2. . . . . . . 3-12 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M11 SERVICE PISTOL AT THE CLEARING BARREL . . . . . . . .2. . .6 3. . . . . Holstering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 3. . . . . . . . . . . .9 3. . . . . . . . .8 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . .2 3. . . . . M11 Service Pistol Associated Components. . . . . . . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. .1 3. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M11 Service Pistol . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOAD AND MAKE READY Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M11 Service Pistol UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M11 Service Pistol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Condition Codes for the M11 Service Pistol . . .2 M11 SERVICE PISTOL DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . .4 3. . . . . . . . . 3-9 Procedures to LOAD . . . . 2-21 M9 SERVICE PISTOL DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . . . 2-21 CHAPTER 3 — M11 SERVICE PISTOL 3. .5 3. . . . 2-21 M9 SERVICE PISTOL SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . .1 3. . . . . 3-12 Procedures to UNLOAD .1. . . . . .5. . . . 2. .2 2. . .2 3. . . . .6 2. . . . .4. . . . . . .3 3. . .1. . . . . . . . . .8 UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M9 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M9 Service Pistol . SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M9 Service Pistol . . .3 2.2. . . . .2 Page No. . . . .3 3. . . . . .3. . .3. Inherent Safety Features of the M11 Service Pistol . .2. . . 2-15 UNLOAD. . . . . . . .4 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Handling Commands for the M11 Service Pistol. . .1. . . . 2-17 DRAWING. . .1 3.2 3. . . . . . .1. . . . . Introduction to Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . 3-13 3-13 3-14 3-14 M11 SERVICE PISTOL SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . .1 3. . . .4 2. . . . . . . . UNLOAD.3. . .3 2. . . . . . . . .1 2. . . .2 2.3. . . . . . .3. 2-18 2-18 2-19 2-20 M9 SERVICE PISTOL ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .6 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . SHOW CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . 3-12 Procedures to UNLOAD. . M11 Service Pistol Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 AUG 2003 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.7 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M11 Service Pistol Technical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . Cycle of Operation for the M11 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . .3 M14 RIFLE DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION Description of the M14 Rifle. . LOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-1 4-1 4-2 4-5 4-5 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-14 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . .1 4. . Procedures to Present the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . HOLSTERING. . . . . . . . . Safe Handling Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun on the Range SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN AT THE CLEARING BARREL . . 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unload/Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AND RELOADING THE M11 SERVICE PISTOL . . Description of the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Technical Characteristics . . . . . . . MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Condition Codes for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 4-16 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 CHAPTER 4 — MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN 4. . . . . .2. . . . . .5 4. . . M14 Rifle Technical Characteristics .1 5. . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . .8 DRAWING. . . . . . . .4 4. . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . 4-16 CHAPTER 5 — M14 RIFLE 5. . . . .2 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . Holstering . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .7 3. . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . .1 5. . .2. . . . . . . Cycle of Operation for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun .2 4. . . .6 4.2. . .3 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . M14 Rifle Major Components . 3-19 M11 SERVICE PISTOL SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . .3 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . . . . . . . UNLOAD. . . . . . . . . . . .5 4.1 4. . .5 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 4. SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . .4 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Major Components . . . . 5-1 5-1 5-2 5-2 11 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-18 M11 SERVICE PISTOL ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . . 3-19 M11 SERVICE PISTOL DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . . .3 4. . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . .2 Page No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . .3 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Handling Commands for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. Show Clear Transfer . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . 4-16 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . .2 4. . Drawing . .6 3.1. . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3 M14 RIFLE SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. .2 6. . . . . . . . . . 5-7 5-7 5-8 5-8 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-12 5-12 5-13 5-14 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M14 RIFLE AT THE CLEARING BARREL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures to Present the M14 Rifle .4. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M14 Rifle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . .1 6. . . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Introduction to Remedial Action . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Handling Commands for the M14 Rifle . . . . . . . Weapon Condition Codes for the M14 Rifle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .1 5.1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . UNLOAD.NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . M14 RIFLE ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M14 Rifle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4.4. . . . . . . . . 5-15 CHAPTER 6 — M16 (SERIES) RIFLE 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . .1 6. . . . . . . . . .2 5. . . . . . . .6 5. . .1. . . . . . . . . . . Procedures to Present the M16 (Series) Rifle. .2 6. . . 6-1 6-1 6-1 6-2 6-4 6-4 6-8 6-8 6-9 6-9 6-12 6-13 6-13 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-15 6-16 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . .4 6. .4.3. . . . . .1 5. .1 6. . . . . . . . . SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M16 (SERIES) RIFLE AT THE CLEARING BARREL . . . . . . . . . Weapon Handling Commands for the M16 (Series) Rifle . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . . . . .3 5. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M16 (Series) Rifle. . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle of Operation for the M16 (Series) Rifle . . . .3 6. . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 5. . . . .2 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 5. . .1.2 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUG 2003 12 . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M14 Rifle M14 RIFLE SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES Weapon Transfer From One Person to Another . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Technical Characteristics . . . .4 5. . . . . 5-15 M14 RIFLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the M16A3 Rifle . . . . . .2 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 M14 RIFLE SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . . . . . Introduction to Remedial Action . . . . . . . .7 Cycle of Operation for the M14 Rifle . . 5. . . . .1. . . . . .3. Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M14 Rifle .4 6. Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle on the Range . .1 6. . . . . . . . Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M14 Rifle on the Range . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .3 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION. . . . . . . .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 6. . SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle M16 (SERIES) RIFLE SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES. . . . . .2 Page No.1. . . . . . . . . .3 5. . . . . . . . . . . UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 5. . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . . . . . UNLOAD. . .2. . . . . . Weapon Transfer From One Person to Another .4 5.3 5. . .3. . . . .5 5. . .2 5.3 6. . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Condition Codes for the M16 (Series) Rifle . . . . . . .

.2. . . . . . . . . . .1 7. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . .4 8. . . . . Description of the M79 Grenade Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . .3 8. . . .1 7. . . . . . .3 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . Safe Handling Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. . . . 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-2 7-2 7-4 7-4 7-4 7-6 7-6 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES . . . . . . .3. . . .1.3 7. .5 6. . . . . . . . . . .7 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . . . .2 8. . . . . . . . and Stoppages for the M203 Grenade Launcher M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . Cycle of Operation. .2. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .6 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION . . .6 6. . . . .4 8. . . M79 Grenade Launcher Technical Characteristics. . . . . . . . 7-8 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M203 Grenade Launcher . . . .3 8. .1. . . . . Cycle of Operation. . . 7-11 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . 6-17 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . . . 7-8 Weapons Transfers From One Person to Another . .1 8. . M79 Grenade Launcher Major Components . . . . . . . . Weapon Condition Codes for the M203 Grenade Launcher and M16A3 Rifle Weapon Handling Commands for the M203 Grenade Launcher . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8-1 8-1 8-2 8-2 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 8-5 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . 6-17 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION . . . . 7-11 CHAPTER 8 — M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER 8.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.3 8. . . . . . . 7-11 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS. . . . 7-8 Procedures to Present the M203 Grenade Launcher . . 8-7 Weapon Transfer From One Person to Another . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 7. . . . .1.2 8. . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 13 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . .2.2. . . . .5 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safe Handling Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . M203 Grenade Launcher Major Components . . . . and Stoppages for the M79 Grenade Launcher . . . .1. Weapon Handling Commands for the M79 Grenade Launcher . . . . . . . . .1 8.2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . .4 7. . . . Malfunctions. . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . .4 7. . . . . . . . .2 8. . . . . 6-17 CHAPTER 7 — M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER 7. . . . . . . . .1. . . . . Safe Handling Procedures for the M79 Grenade Launcher on the Range .3. . . . . . . . . . . .1 7. . . 7-10 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . .1 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. . . .NTRP 3-07. . .2 Page No. . Malfunctions. . Description of the M203 Grenade Launcher . . . .1 7. Safe Handling Procedures for the M203 Grenade Launcher on the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . Weapon Condition Codes for the M79 Grenade Launcher . .2 7. . . . M203 Grenade Launcher Technical Characteristics . . . . . . . .1. 6. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . 10-7 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY .2 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle of Operation for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun .4 9.NTRP 3-07. . . . . 9-9 Weapon Condition Codes for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . . . Remedial Actions for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . . .1 9. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Technical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . .1. . . .4 9. . .5 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION Description of the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . .1. . . 10-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Major Components . . . .2. . . . .4 8. . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Page No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 9. . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Major Components. . . .2 10. . . . . .2 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . 10-11 AUG 2003 14 . 9-12 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . Weapon Handling Commands for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . .3 8. .1. 9-9 Weapon Handling Commands for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 10. . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . .1 9. 9-10 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .1. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . .3 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.5 9.3 9. . . .4 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 9. . . . . . 8-10 CHAPTER 9 — M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN 9. . . . . . . . . . . Remedial Actions for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . .1 10. . . . . . 9-1 9-1 9-2 9-2 9-2 9-2 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . 8.1. . . . . .3 9. . . . . 10-7 . . . . . . . . .3 9.3 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION. . Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun on the Range. . Description of the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . . .2 8. . 10-1 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-2 10-5 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES Weapon Condition Codes for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . . . 9-12 CHAPTER 10 — M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN 10. .2. .2 10. . . . . . . .1. . . . . . 8-8 Procedures to Present the M79 Grenade Launcher . . . . 8-10 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS .2. . . 9-9 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun on the Range . Cycle of Operation for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M79 Grenade Launcher. .3 10. . . .2 9. 8-10 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Technical Characteristics .

5 11. . . . . . . . . . .1. .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 11. 11-8 M2 . .1. . . . . Cycle of Operation. . . . . . .4 10. . . . . . . . . 12-2 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES . . . . . . .3 12. . . . . .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . Malfunctions. . . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 12. . . . . 12-10 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun on the Range . . . . 11-8 . . . . . . . Cycle of Operation for the M2 . . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Technical Characteristics . . . . .7 11. .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN RANGE CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12-1 12-2 12-2 . . . . . . . . . . .1 12. . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Components of the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun . . Remedial Actions for the M2 . M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Rates of Fire for the M2 . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 11. . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . .5 M2 . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun . .2 12. 11-10 M2 . .1 11.3 11. . . . . 10-11 CHAPTER 11 — M2 . . . . . . 10. . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . 11-10 CHAPTER 12 — MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN 12. . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun . . . .4 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION . 10-11 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M2 . .6 11. . . . .1. . .1. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .2 11. . . MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Technical Characteristics . . . . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun. . . . M2 . .4 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Associated Components. Weapon Handling Commands for the M2 . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Weapon Condition Codes for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 M2 . . 11-8 . . . . . . . . .1 12.2 11. 12-12 MK19 MOD 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES . .2 Page No. .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES Weapon Condition Codes for the M2 . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 12.5 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES .2.1 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 . . .1 11. . . . . . .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION Description of the M2 . . .2. . 12-12 15 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . Description of MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun on the Range . . . .3 11. . . . . and Stoppages for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun . . . . 12-10 Weapon Handling Commands for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun . .1. . . . . . 11-1 11-1 11-2 11-2 11-2 11-2 11-3 11-5 M2 . .2 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN 11. . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun . . . . .4 11. . 12-10 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY . . .

.2 Page No. . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . .3 13. . . . . . . . . 15-3 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . Riot Baton Physiological Considerations . . . . . . OC Canister Spray Patterns . Throwing Positions for Employment of the MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade . Grips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Employment Considerations of OC Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . .2 15. . . Riot Baton Retention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Major Components. . . . . . . . .3. . . . .1 13. . . . . . . .2. . .1 13. . CHAPTER 14 — NONLETHAL WEAPONS 14. . . . . . .1. Description of Marking Cartridge Description of Barrel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedures and Techniques in the Contaminated Environment of OC Spray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grip. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 14. . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . and Draws . . . . . . .1.3. .2. . . . Components of the OC Spray Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .3. . . . .1 15. . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . .2 15. . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of the Riot Baton .1. . . . . . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . 14-1 RIOT BATON . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS . . .5 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nondetonated MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .2 13. . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 14. . . . . and Stance Methods of the OC Spray Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 14. . . . . . . . . . . .3. . 15-3 M16 (Series) Rifle Adapter Kit Major Components . . . Physical and Psychological Symptoms and Effectiveness of OC Spray . . . . . .2 13. . .3. . . . . . . . . .3 14. .10 DEFINITION OF NONLETHAL WEAPONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 13. . . . . . . . .2.3 14. . . . . . Riot Baton Carries. . . Delivery Techniques and Tactical Applications of OC Spray . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . Performance Characteristics . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 15 — SIMUNITIONS 15. . 15-4 AUG 2003 16 . . . . . . . . . Three Levels of Contamination . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Technical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 14. . MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Handling and Deployment Procedures .3 15. . . . . . . .3 15. . . . . Definition of OC Spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 14-2 14-2 14-4 14-7 14-9 14-10 14-10 14-10 14-10 14-13 14-14 14-15 14-17 14-17 14-17 14-18 OLEORESIN CAPSICUM SPRAY. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .1 14. . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13-1 13-2 13-2 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-6 MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES. .2 DESCRIPTION . .1 14. . . . . . . . . . . .9 14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 13. . . .1 15. . Drawing. . . . . . . . .2 14. . . . . . .8 14. . . . . . . . . . . Riot Baton Employment Techniques . .3. . . . . 15-1 15-1 15-1 15-1 SAFETY . . . . . . . 15-3 Converted M16 (Series) Rifle Loading .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION . .7 14. . . . . . . Training . .5 14. . . . . 12-12 CHAPTER 13 — MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE 13. . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . Description of the MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade . .2 14. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .4. .4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . 15-5 M9 Pistol Adapter Kit Components . . 15-5 Converted M9 Pistol Loading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature Limitations . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . .3 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 INDEX . . . . . . 15-6 15-6 15-6 15-7 KIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . Index-1 17 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . . . Barrel Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . .4 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 GENERAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . Dusty and Sandy Areas (M16 (Series) Rifle Only) . . . . . . . . .6 M9 PISTOL . . . .1 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 15.5 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 15. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . Ammunition. . . . . . . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Receiver Group . . . 2-6 Examples of Shooter-Induced Stoppages . . 2-8 M9 Service Pistol Weapon Condition Codes . Figure 4-7. . . . . . 3-5 M11 Service Pistol Cycle of Operation . . . . . . . . 3-7 M11 Service Pistol Weapon Condition Codes . . AUG 2003 Mossberg 500 Shotgun Left Side . . . . General Weapon Condition Codes . . . . . . . . Logistics. . . . . 3-4 M11 Service Pistol Slide and Barrel Assembly . . . . . . . . . PROCEDURES. 2-2 M9 Service Pistol Specifications. . . . . . . . . Figure 3-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Barrel Group . . . Safety Rules for Responsible Weapons Handling. . . . . . AND CONTROLS Figure 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-4. Ammunition. . . . . M9 Service Pistol Left Side . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Trigger Group . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Right Side . . 2-11 M9 Service Pistol Drawing Technique Stages. Figure 2-6. . . . . . . . . . 2-20 CHAPTER 3 — M11 SERVICE PISTOL Figure 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 M9 Service Pistol Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-3. . . . . . . Figure 3-7. . . . . 3-9 M11 Service Pistol Weapon Handling Commands . . . . CHAPTER 1 — INTRODUCTION TO WEAPONS SAFETY. . . . Figure 2-7. . . . . 3-19 CHAPTER 4 — MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN Figure 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-4. . . . . Figure 3-6. . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Weapon Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . and Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-3 1-3 1-4 CHAPTER 2 — M9 SERVICE PISTOL Figure 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 M9 Service Pistol Weapon Handling Commands . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Specifications. . . . . . . Guard Mount Procedures . . . . . . . . . . 18 . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Cycle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. Logistics. . . . . . . Standard Weapons Handling Commands . . Figure 2-10. . . . . . . Figure 2-8. . . . Figure 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M11 Service Pistol Left Side . . . . . . . . . Figure 2-2. . . . . . . . 3-2 M11 Service Pistol Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-9 4-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 M11 Service Pistol Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ammunition. . . . . 2-19 M9 Service Pistol Reload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Page No. . . . . . . Figure 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 M11 Service Pistol Receiver Assembly . . . . . . Figure 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . Mossberg 500 Shotgun Weapon Condition Codes . . . . . Figure 4-8. .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . and Safeties Mossberg 500 Shotgun Stock Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 M9 Service Pistol Cycle of Operation. . . . . . . Figure 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . and Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 M11 Service Pistol Drawing Technique Stages . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 M9 Service Pistol Slide and Barrel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Examples of Shooter-Induced Stoppages . Figure 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-10. . . . . . . . 3-18 M11 Service Pistol Reload. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 4-3. . . . . . . . . Logistics. . . . . . . . Figure 3-3. Figure 3-8. Figure 4-2. . . . 2-3 M9 Service Pistol Receiver Assembly . Figure 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-5 7-5 7-5 7-7 CHAPTER 8 — M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER Figure 8-1. . . . . . Ammunition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7-2. . . M203 Grenade Launcher Weapon Condition Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Lower Receiver Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Specifications. . . . Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-5. . . . . . M14 Rifle Weapon Condition Codes . . . Figure 9-2. . . . . Figure 8-2. . . . .2 Page No. . . Figure 8-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . Ammunition. 9-2 19 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-6 5-8 5-9 CHAPTER 6 — M16 (SERIES) RIFLE Figure 6-1. . . . . . . M16A3 Rifle Right Side . . . . . . . . Figure 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Weapon Condition Codes. . . . . . . . . Figure 8-3. . . M16 (Series) Rifle Specifications. . . . . M16A3 Rifle Left Side . . . . . . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Left Side . . . Logistics. . . . . . . . Figure 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . M14 Rifle Cycle of Operation. . . . . . 9-1 M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Right Side . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8-8. . M16 (Series) Rifle Stoppage Remedial Action Procedures . . . . . . . . . . Ammunition. . . . . . . . Figure 5-8. . . . . . . . Figure 6-3. M203 Grenade Launcher Cycle of Operation . . and Safeties . . . . . . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Cycle of Operation . . Figure 6-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . and Safeties. . . . . . . . . . M203 Grenade Launcher Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Left Side . . . . . . . . Logistics. . . . . . Figure 6-5. . . . . . . Figure 7-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M14 Rifle Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M14 Rifle Weapon Handling Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7-7. . . . . . M14 Rifle Stoppage Remedial Action Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Weapon Handling Commands . . Figure 7-3. . . and Safeties M14 Rifle Trigger Housing Group . . . . . . . . Figure 6-2. . . . Figure 5-3. . and Safeties M203 Grenade Launcher Major Components. . . . . Figure 5-7. . M203 Grenade Launcher and M16A3 Rifle Weapon Handling Commands . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 5 — M14 RIFLE Figure 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-8. . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Right Side . . . . . M14 Rifle Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-2. . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Upper Receiver Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Differences Between Models . . . . Figure 6-4. . . . . Figure 7-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 (Series) Rifle Weapon Handling Commands . 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-6 6-7 6-9 6-9 CHAPTER 7 — M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER Figure 7-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Weapon Condition Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-4 8-6 8-6 8-7 CHAPTER 9 — M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN Figure 9-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 8-7. . . . . . . . . . Safe Handling Warnings for the M79 Grenade Launcher. Figure 8-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 5-9. M14 Rifle Barrel and Receiver Group Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 6-9. . . Safe Handling Warnings for the M203 Grenade Launcher . . . Figure 7-4. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 7-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M79 Grenade Launcher Cycle of Operation . Ammunition. . . . . . . . Figure 6-10. . . . M203 Grenade Launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M14 Rifle Stock Group . . . . . . . . . M14 Rifle Right Side . . . M203 Grenade Launcher Specifications. . . . Figure 8-4. . . . . . . . . .

. 11-3 11-4 11-4 11-8 11-9 CHAPTER 12 — MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN Figure 12-1. . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes . . . . M2 . . . . . . MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Technical Characteristics MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Major Components . Figure 11-4. 11-1 . . . Figure 10-4. . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-3. Figure 10-5. 12-2 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Specifications. . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Left Side. . . . . . 12-4 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes . . . . . 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-5 10-9 10-9 CHAPTER 11 — M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-3. . . . Figure 13-2. . . . . Figure 10-8. and Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 10-2. . Figure 12-2. . . . and Safeties . . . . . . . M2 . . . . . . M60/M60E3 Medium Machine Gun Specific Major Components . . . Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-6. . . . . . . . . . M60D Medium Machine Gun Major Components . . . . . . 12-4 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Cycle of Operation . . . . . Logistics. . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Right Side . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . Figure 9-10. . . . . Figure 12-7. . . . . . . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Left Side . . . . . . . and Safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . M2 . . . . . . Figure 9-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Differences Between Models . . . . . . . . . . Figure 13-3. . . . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands . . . . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Cycle of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . Logistics. . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Side View . . Figure 12-5. . . . . Figure 12-4. . . . . . . Figure 11-6. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun . . . Figure 13-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Throwing Positions . . . . Figure 9-7. . Differences Between M60. . . . . . 10-1 . . . . . . . . . . . M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M2 . . . . . . . . Figure 9-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Cycle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ammunition. . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN Figure 11-1. . . . . . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Common Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Page No. . . . . . . . and M60E3 Medium Machine Gun Model Components . . . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Common Major Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Specifications. . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Major Components . . . . . . . . . . Logistics. . . . MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade . Ammunition. . . . . . . . 13-1 13-2 13-4 13-5 AUG 2003 20 . . . . . . . . . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Cycle of Operation . . . . M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 11-5. . . . . . . Figure 9-5. . . . Ammunition. . . . . 11-2 . . . Figure 11-3. . . Figure 10-7. . . 12-11 CHAPTER 13 — MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE Figure 13-1. . . . . . . Figure 11-2. Ammunition. . . . M60D. . . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Right Side . Figure 10-6. . . . . . Figure 11-7. . . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Specifications. 10-2 . . . . . . . 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-5 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-9 CHAPTER 10 — M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN Figure 10-1. . . . . . . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Specifications. . . . . .2. . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes . . . .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands . . . . . and Safeties . . . . . Figure 12-6. . . . . . . . . . 12-10 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 9-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 12-3.

. . . . . . . .2 Page No. . . . . 14-9 Six Hinges of the Human Body. . . .NTRP 3-07. . . Figure 14-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 Hand-Held OC Canister . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . Figure 14-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter Kit Specifications for M16 (Series) Rifle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Riot Baton Strikes and Origination Carries . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 15-2 15-4 15-5 21 AUG 2003 . 14-5 Target Areas of the Human Body and Impact Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 15-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11 OC Canister Spray Patterns and Particulate Size . . Riot Baton . Adapter Kit Specifications for M9 Service Pistol . . . . . . . . . Figure 15-4. . . . . . . . . . Figure 14-7. . . . Figure 15-3. . . M16 (Series) Rifle Adapter Kit Major Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . CHAPTER 14 — NONLETHAL WEAPONS Figure 14-1. . . . . . . . 14-14 OC Spray Delivery Methods . . . 14-15 CHAPTER 15 — SIMUNITIONS Figure 15-1. . Figure 14-2. . . . . . . Figure 14-6. . . . . . . . . . 14-11 OC Spray Canister Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Riot Baton Basic Components . Training Upper Receiver Barrel Assembly Subcomponents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 14-8. . . . . . . .

NTRP 3-07.2.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 22 .

OPNAVINST 3591. 28 January 2002. DoD Instruction 2000. 01 March 1999. DoD Directive 5200. September 2001. Antiterrorism/Force Protection.1D. DoD Combating Terrorism Program Procedures. 23 AUG 2003 .1.14. Instructor Guide: INIWIC. Commander’s Guide. Marine Corps Security Forces Battalion Weapons Handling Procedures. Riot Baton Course: Inter-service Nonlethal Individual Weapons Instructor Course. DoD Antiterrorism Standards. 02 June 1998. Oleoresin Capsicum Training: Inter-service Nonlethal Individual Weapons Instructor Course. NWP 3-07.2. 15 November 2002.2. BnO 5500. Small Arms Training and Qualification. CNO WASHINGTON DC 062250Z NOV 02.2 (signature copy). Navy Law Enforcement Manual. September 2001. and Explosives (AA&E). OPNAVINST 5530. NLW TACTICAL Employment of Nonlethal Weapons. Antiterrorism/Force Protection for Naval Operations.39A.8-R. The Marine Corps Antiterrorism/Force Protection (AT/FP) Program.06. November 2001. September 2001. 10 December 1999.1C. Standard Operating Procedures for Fleet Antiterrorism Security Team (FAST) Company. 12 September 2000.13B. Ammunition. Operational Risk Management. 15 June 1994.1C. Force Protection (AT/FP) Alignment.3.2. Department of the Navy Physical Security Instruction for Conventional Arms. Instructor Guide: INIWIC. September 2001. OPNAVINST 5530. Use of Deadly Force and the Carrying of Firearms by DoD Personnel Engaged in Law Enforcement and Security Duties. Department of the Navy Booklet. DoD Directive 5210. Navy Doctrine for Antiterrorism/Force Protection. Navy Physical Security. MCO 3302.56. 25 August 1998. Navy Anti-terrorism.2A.12. Draft. DoD Instruction 2000. 13 April 1999. May 1991.14C. OPNAVINST 5580. Small Arms Training and Qualification. DoD Antiterrorism/Force Protection (AT/FP) Program. OPNAVINST 3500. CNO WASHINGTON DC 152310Z NOV 02.1A CH-2. December 2002. 13 May 1999. OPNAVINST 3591. NTTP 3-07. Physical Security Program. 26 September 2000.16.2 BIBLIOGRAPHY 3000 FAST. 14 June 2001.NTRP 3-07. 06 November 2002.09. DoD Instruction 2000. Nonlethal Weapons Training Policy. NTTP 3-07.

February 1999. SW 370-BB-OPI-010. 28 September 1992. TM 9-1005-224-10. M79 40mm Grenade Launcher. NAVSPECWAR Weapons Organizational Maintenance Armorer’s Repair Course. M240 Machine Gun. M2HB . SECNAVINST 5530.S. NAVSPECWAR Weapons Organizational Maintenance Armorer’s Repair Course. NAVSPECWAR Weapons Organizational Maintenance Armorer’s Repair Course.2. M16A3 Rifle. MK19 40mm Grenade Machine Gun. 2002. February 1999.29B. Trainee Guide: M2HB . June 2001. M203 40mm Grenade Launcher.NTRP 3-07. Trainee Guide: Mossberg 500 12 Gauge Shotgun.50 Caliber Machine Gun. SW 363-C3-MMM-010. and Personal Protection. M14 Rifle. Marine Corps Nonlethal Weapons Capability Sets. Operator’s Manual.S. February 1968. Use of Deadly Force and the Carrying of Firearms by Personnel of the Department of the Navy in Conjunction with Law Enforcement.2A. December 1984. Principal Technical Characteristics of U. April 1998. June 1996. TM 8000-10/1C. DON Antiterrorism/Force Protection (AT/FP) Program. SECNAVINST 5500. Principal Technical Characteristics and Components List of U. SW 370-BUJ-OPI-010. TM 9-1005-223-12P. AUG 2003 24 . 21 March 2001. 12 Gauge Shotgun. Operator’s Manual. NAVSPECWAR Weapons Organizational Maintenance Armorer’s Repair Course. TM 9-1005-317-10. Operator’s Manual. Operator’s Manual. June 1992. SW 361-AB-MMO-010. Operator’s Manual. Marine Corps Ordnance Equipment. Naval Security Force Employment and Operations. 7 March 2000. Trainee Guide: M60 Machine Gun. March 1997. TM 10818A-12&P. NAVSPECWAR Weapons Organizational Maintenance Armorer’s Repair Course. Security Duties. TM 9-1010-205-10. Operator’s Manual. February 1999. TM 9-1005-313-10. December 1997. Operator’s Manual. Combined Recoil Booster (CRB) with Discriminator Operator’s Manual. October 2001. Trainee Guide: M203 Grenade Launcher. May 2001. April 1998. NAVSPECWAR Weapons Organizational Maintenance Armorer’s Repair Course. Manufacturer’s Technical Manual and Product Literature. M9 Semiautomatic Pistol. Trainee Guide: M14 Rifle. Simunitions. TM XXXXXX-XX (Draft). Mossberg 500.50 Caliber Machine Gun. July 1985.2 SECNAVINST 3300. Operator’s Manual. August 1986. M60 Machine Gun. December 1993.4C. Operator’s Manual. Trainee Guide: MK19 40mm Grenade Machine Gun. Operator’s Manual. July 1988. TM 9-1010-221-10.

propellent. chambering. magazine removed. breech. 25 AUG 2003 . The cylindrical part or hollow shaft of a weapon through which ammunition travels. A person in charge of maintenance and repair of the small arms of a military unit. armorer. The portion of the weapon that rests firmly against the shoulder to provide basic firing control. bore.2. slide locked to the rear. administrative transport. bayonet. Kit that changes the operating mode of a converted weapon from gas-operated to straight blowback. primer. A hood covering the head and neck as protective clothing or to prohibit identification. Consists of a casing. A building for storing military ordnance. buttstock. chamber empty. B balaclava. audible pop. armory.NTRP 3-07. carrying handle. extraction. usually shown in hundredths of an inch or millimeters. The mechanism that provides stripping. The active ingredient. The inside diameter of the bore of a weapon. and the weapon’s failure to cycle. ammunition. locking. Provides a means for hand-carrying a weapon. Serves as a support for all major components and controls the action of the weapon through the cycle of operation. and a projectile that can be fired from a weapon. bolt. and trigger finger along receiver. and ejection of cartridges using drive springs and propelling gases. barrel and receiver group. bolt and carrier assembly. A method of safely carrying a weapon without a holster with safety on. derived from the pepper plant. The part of a weapon behind the barrel. barrel. firing. A stand having two legs for the support of a weapon. used in Oleoresin Capsicum pepper spray. lower report. The mechanism that contains the firing pin and the extractor.2 GLOSSARY A adapter kit. capsaicin. Normally identifiable by reduced recoil. bipod. The inside of a gun barrel containing lands and grooves. simunitions. A definitive sound during firing that indicates only a portion of the propellant has been ignited. A blade adapted to fit the muzzle end of a rifle and used as a weapon in close combat. C caliber.

Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by means of an extractor claw. clearing barrel. A cylindrical case of metal or plastic containing the charge. detonator assembly. cocking. A built-in safety feature on a pistol that rotates the firing pin striker from any contact with the hammer and out of the path of the firing pin. D decocking/safety lever. A mechanism that rotates down. produce enemy casualties. primer. An internal safety feature that prevents a weapon from firing fully automatic. concussion grenade. AUG 2003 26 . A device in a gun that ejects the empty shell after each firing. cease fire. The device that explodes the TNT filler on the MK 3A2 concussion grenade. and the projectile for a weapon. driving spring rod assembly. disassembly lever. Weapons that require more than one person to operate. crew-served weapons. chambering. An enclosed space in the bore of a gun that holds the charge. disconnector. Cease engagement of the target. A mechanism that adjusts the elevation of the aperture on the rear sight. Sets the hammer of a weapon in a position ready for firing. show clear procedures. elevation knob. dud-fired grenade. chamber.2. A grenade that has not detonated as designed. A receptacle that provides a safe direction in which to point a weapon when performing the load. make ready. Provides energy for returning the bolt and opening the rod assembly to the firing position on a machine gun. cook-off. A device that prevents a gun muzzle from rising. An offensive weapon designed to counter and repel threats. and minimize fragmentation hazards to friendly troops. A mechanism that cocks a weapon. The unintentional discharge of a round by the heat of a very hot chamber and not by the firing system. A stoppage caused by two rounds becoming lodged in the receiver. E ejector.2 cartridge. unlocking the slide from the receiver for disassembly. The action of inserting ammunition and chambering it in a weapon with the safety on.NTRP 3-07. compensator. charging handle. The process of a round of ammunition leaving the magazine to be chambered. double feed. extracting/extractor. unload or unload. The pushing of a round into the chamber. F feeding. condition one load. but is still capable of detonating.

holster. The action of taking a weapon off safe and pulling the trigger. A small bomb or explosive missile that is detonated by a fuze and thrown by hand or launcher.2 fire. guard mount. L lanyard. front sight. Standardized weapons transfer and inspection procedures between personnel watches. The action of inserting ammunition into a weapon.NTRP 3-07. fuze. load and make ready. Removal of a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch and the subsequent movement of the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the round to ensure the magazine is filled.2. fore-end. A dangerous situation in which the propellent has not fully ignited in the cartridge case but still has the potential to fire. Used to open and close the bolt assembly of a shotgun. The action of chambering ammunition in a weapon with the safety on. M magazine. magazine tube. A device located on the top of a gun barrel used to assist aim by guiding the eye to the target. The part of a gunlock that strikes the firing pin. flash suppressor. The area of a machine gun in which live rounds are inserted. load. A cord attached to a pistol to maintain physical contact with the weapon. make ready. I indexing the magazine. A mechanism that reduces muzzle flash and helps reduce climb and recoil by venting gas to all sides of the muzzle. A removable supply chamber in some types of weapons in which cartridges are held to be fed into the firing chamber. The action of loading and chambering a weapon with the safety on. loading port. The cylinder on a shotgun located beneath the barrel that stores live rounds to be fed into the firing chamber. 27 AUG 2003 . A case of leather or similar material into which a pistol fits snugly and attaches to a belt or strap for carriage or transport of the weapon. H hammer. G grenade. permitting loading and firing of the weapon and ejection of the spent cartridge. hangfire. A mechanical or electrical mechanism used to detonate an explosive charge or device such as a bomb or grenade.

The greatest distance anticipated for ammunition to travel. A device that cocks a weapon. Action taken to assess an interruption in a weapon’s cycle of operation or expected performance and the steps necessary to correct the problem. misfire. thrown. N nonlethal weapons. pistol grip. O Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) spray. loaded with a soap-based marking compound (nonlethal) for use in simunitions training. riot baton. P pepper spray. AUG 2003 28 . remedial action. When a weapon continues to fire after the trigger is released. Common name for Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) spray. A cap or tube containing a small amount of explosive used to detonate the main explosive charge of a weapon. or otherwise propelled forward such as a bullet. the method of operation that ejects spent shell casings and loads the ammunition. runaway gun. The failure of a weapon to fire satisfactorily or perform as designed. marking cartridge. The forward. R range. Failure of a weapon to fire as anticipated. charge of shot. projectile. Reduced-energy cartridges. The greatest distance anticipated for accurate target engagement. A handle that is designed to be grasped and held. maximum range. A lightweight carrier in which a projectile of a smaller caliber is centered so as to permit firing the projectile within a larger-caliber weapon.2. maximum effective range. Also called uncontrolled fire. Focuses the eye on target and is adjustable for windage and elevation. or grenade. operating rod handle. rear sight. S sabot.2 malfunction. pump. that leaves a red or blue mark on the target. primer.NTRP 3-07. The backward action of a weapon upon firing. The maximum effective horizontal distance that a weapon can deliver a projectile. recoil. muzzle. A skin and mucous membrane irritant that is used as a nonlethal weapon. discharging end of the barrel of a weapon. An object that is fired. Weapons not capable of causing death. A nonlethal impact weapon utilized for crowd control and self-defense. On some shotguns.

small-arms training system developed for the M16 series of weapons and for the M9 pistol. unload.2. The rear wooden. Safe procedure for transferring a weapon from one person to another with ammunition removed. trigger guard. show clear transfer. selector. trigger. Characteristic weight or distance of the trigger mechanism while firing.2 safety. single action trigger pull. The catch in a gunlock that keeps the hammer half-cocked or fully cocked. target range. swivel. Occurs when a machine gun continues to fire after the trigger is released. the hammer is cocked and the weight of the pull is reduced.NTRP 3-07. The act of removing ammunition from a weapon with the safety on. An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation usually discovered when the weapon will not fire. trigger pull. show clear. or plastic handle or support of a rifle or automatic weapon to which the receiver is attached. metal. simunitions. an object or opponent shot at in order to secure an objective. serrated sides. and safety on. unload. A mechanism that selects the mode of firing. stock. chamber empty. transports. The device that secures the sling to the weapon. Also called runaway gun. T target. A place equipped for practice in shooting at targets. Procedures for safely carrying a weapon while concurrently staying prepared to engage a threat. The lever pressed by the finger to discharge a weapon. an object that is shot at to test accuracy. The section of a pistol slide provided for establishing a firm grip to chamber a round or lock slide to rear. stoppage. In weapons training. 29 AUG 2003 . A mechanism that protects the trigger from being accidentally depressed. U uncontrolled fire. A nonlethal. Radioactive material sealed in Pyrex tubes providing self-luminous front and rear sights. tritium sights. sling. A device on a weapon used to assist aim by guiding the eye. sight. The action of checking the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present and the weapon is on safe. In combat. On pistols. The mechanism that allows a weapon to fire when in the off position and prevents firing in the on position. Also called the selector lever. A strap used to carry a weapon over the shoulder. sear.

Any voluntary exchange of a weapon between individuals. 2.2.NTRP 3-07. Methods of carrying weapons that keep personnel in a state of increased readiness as threat levels increase.2 W weapon condition codes. or 4. Defines a weapon’s readiness to fire and its corresponding safety status. Specified steps in the loading and unloading process of a weapon to change the readiness condition. weapons carries. weapons transfer. designated by Condition 1. as applicable. A mechanism located on the side of the sight assembly of a rifle that adjusts the lateral movement of the rear sights. AUG 2003 30 . 3. windage knob. weapon handling commands.

NTRP 3-07.2.2

PREFACE
NTRP 3-07.2.2, FORCE PROTECTION WEAPONS HANDLING STANDARD PROCEDURES AND GUIDELINES (AUG 2003), is designed as a guide to provide standardized weapons handling procedures that are essential for the safe and effective employment of these weapons. The target audiences for NTRP 3-07.2.2 include all Navy personnel assigned duties involving the use of weapons covered in this publication. This publication should be used in conjunction with OPNAVINST 3591.1 series. Throughout this publication, references to other publications imply the effective edition. Report any page shortage by letter to Commander, Navy Warfare Development Command. ORDERING DATA Order a new publication or change, as appropriate, through the Navy Supply System. Changes to the distribution and allowance lists (to add or delete your command from the distribution list, or to modify the number of copies of a publication that you receive) must be made in accordance with NTTP 1-01. RECOMMENDED CHANGES Recommended changes to this publication may be submitted at any time using the accompanying format for routine changes. Atlantic and Pacific fleet units and stations and all other units and CONUS shore activities submit recommendations to: COMMANDER FLEET FORCES COMMAND 1562 MITSCHER AVE STE 250 NORFOLK VA 23551-2487 In addition, forward two copies of all recommendations to: OFFICE OF THE CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS (N34) 2000 NAVY PENTAGON WASHINGTON DC 20350-2000 COMMANDER NAVY WARFARE DEVELOPMENT COMMAND 686 CUSHING ROAD NEWPORT RI 02841-1207 WEB-BASED CHANGE SUBMISSIONS Recommended change submissions for this publication may be submitted to the Navy doctrine discussion group site. This discussion group may be accessed through the Navy Warfare Development Command (NWDC) SIPRNET website at http://www.nwdc.navy.smil.mil/.

31

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

(CLASSIFICATION)

RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO:
(PUBLICATION NUMBER / REVISION / CHANGE)

DATE:

LOCATION:
(PAGE) (PARA) (LINE) (FIG. NO.)

TYPE OF CHANGE:

ADD

DELETE

MODIFY

TEXT

FIGURE

EXACT CHANGE RECOMMENDED:

USE ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NEEDED. GIVE VERBATIM TEXT CHANGES. IF FIGURE IS TO BE ADDED, SUPPLY ROUGH SKETCH OR IDENTIFY SOURCE. IF FIGURE IS TO BE CHANGED, INCLUDE A MARKED UP COPY OF EXISTING FIGURE.

RATIONALE:

SUBMITTED BY:
(ORIGINATING COMMAND) (ORIGINATOR SEQUENCE NO.)

(POINT OF CONTACT)

(PHONE - IDENTIFY DSN OR COMM)

PRA ACTION: REMARKS:

ACCEPTED
(USE ADDITIONAL SHEETS IF NEEDED)

MODIFIED

REJECTED

(PRA POINT OF CONTACT)

(PHONE - IDENTIFY DSN OR COMM)

CONFERENCE DATE:

CONFERENCE AGENDA ITEM NO.: PAGE OF

(CLASSIFICATION)

AUG 2003

32

NTRP 3-07.2.2

FM ORIGINATOR TO COMFLTFORCOM NORFOLK VA//JJJ// INFO CNO WASHINGTON DC//N34// COMNAVWARDEVCOM NEWPORT RI//N5// NAVWARCOL NEWPORT RI//213// BT CLASSIFICATION//N03510// MSGID/GENADMIN/(Organization ID)// SUBJ/URGENT CHANGE RECOMMENDATION FOR NTRP 3-07.2.2 (AUG 2003)// REF/A/DOC/NTTP 1-01// POC/(Command Representative)// RMKS/ 1. IAW REF A URGENT (SAFETY) CHANGE IS RECOMMENDED FOR NTRP 3-07.2.2 (AUG 2003) 2. PAGE ______ ART/PARA NO ______ LINE NO ______ FIG NO ______ 3. PROPOSED NEW TEXT (Include classification)

4. JUSTIFICATION. BT

Message provided for subject matter; ensure that actual message conforms to MTF requirements.

33

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

URGENT CHANGE RECOMMENDATIONS When items for changes are considered to be urgent (as defined in NTTP 1-01, and including matters of safety), this information shall be sent by message (see accompanying sample message format) to Commander, Fleet Forces Command, with information copies to Navy Warfare Development Command, and all other commands concerned, clearly explaining the proposed change. Information addresses should comment as appropriate. See NTTP 1-01. CHANGE SYMBOLS Revised text in changes is indicated by a black vertical line in the outside margin of the page, like the one printed next to this paragraph. The change symbol shows where there has been a change. The change might be material added or information restated. A change symbol in the outside margin by the chapter number and title indicates a new or completely revised chapter. WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES The following definitions apply to “WARNINGs,” “CAUTIONs,” and “Notes” found throughout the manual.

An operation procedure, practice, or condition that may result in injury or death if not carefully observed or followed.

An operating procedure, practice, or condition that may result in damage to equipment if not carefully observed or followed. Note An operating procedure, practice, or condition that is essential to emphasize. WORDING The concept of word usage and intended meaning which has been adhered to in preparing this publication is as follows: “Shall” has been used only when application of a procedure is mandatory. “Should” has been used only when application of a procedure is recommended. “May” and “need not” have been used only when application of a procedure is optional. “Will” has been used only to indicate futurity, never to indicate any degree of requirement for application of a procedure.

AUG 2003

34

Observing four safety rules (see Figure 1-1) will ensure safe and effective weapon handling both on the range and in combat.1 SCOPE This publication contains safety information. grenade launchers. and nonlethal weapons. and the maximum range and capabilities of the weapon being used.2. Never insert finger inside trigger guard until prepared to discharge weapon.2. Chapter 15 describes how to use simunitions as a nonlethal. personnel must ensure that the safety remains in the safe position until immediately prior to firing. Proper weapons handling is the responsibility of the person in control of the weapon. 1-1 AUG 2003 . The safety rules set forth in Figure 1-1 must be observed at all times for all weapons.NTRP 3-07. 1.1 Universal Weapons Safety Rules Responsible weapon handling comes as a result of following specific safety rules. Treat every weapon as if it were loaded. small-arms. Procedures. The target audiences for NTRP 3-07. Chapters 2 through 13 present individual weapons data. crew-served weapons. and proper control guidance for Navy small arms.2. and Controls 1. what is beyond the target. 1. Note Be sure of the target. Pointing or aiming a functional weapon at any person or thing is unlawful except when required in the performance of duty.2 WEAPONS SAFETY The most prevalent factor in accidents involving firearms is the assumption that the weapon is not loaded. tactical training tool. authorized procedures. When armed with any weapon for which chambering a round has been authorized.2 include all Navy personnel assigned duties involving the use of weapons covered in this publication. Chapter 1 addresses safety procedures and controls applicable to all weapons. Chapter 14 covers approved nonlethal weapons.2 CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Weapons Safety.

Command-specific guard mount procedures may amplify the basic list. Guard mount procedures are delineated in this publication to ensure that the safe handling procedures for firearms and ammunition discussed herein are effectively integrated in all guard mounts. 1. Standard weapon handling commands are defined in Figure 1-3.3 Weapon Handling Commands The steps in the loading and unloading process provide safe.5 PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS The operational risk management (ORM) process is a decision-making tool used to increase operational effectiveness by anticipating hazards. Once clearing barrel procedures have been completed and weapons are loaded.2. Keep your finger straight and off the trigger until ready to fire.2. 1.2. Supervisors familiar with weapons inspections conducted while in formation should note that these steps have not been included for safety reasons. Upon receipt of the weapon.4 GENERAL CLEARING BARREL PROCEDURES The supervisor initiates clearing barrel procedures during guard mount (see item 2 of Figure 1-4). 3 4 Figure 1-1. RATIONALE This rule will prevent unintentional injury to personnel or damage to property that could occur when handling or transferring possession of a weapon. The supervisor must be thoroughly familiar with all matters directly related to the watch and ensure all personnel are briefed and fully prepared to assume duties.2 General Weapon Condition Codes A weapon’s readiness to fire and its corresponding safety status are described using one of four numbered condition codes. General weapon condition codes are defined in Figure 1-2. 1. Safety Rules for Responsible Weapons Handling 1. Weapon-specific condition codes are detailed in individual chapters of this publication. AUG 2003 1-2 . The actions listed in Figure 1-4 are procedures to be completed during guard mount.3 GUARD MOUNT PROCEDURES Guard mount procedures standardize watch turnover between oncoming and offgoing personnel. and increasing the probability of a successful mission. reducing the potential for loss. Should a supervisor wish to inspect cleanliness or functioning of weapons. Each person shall repeat all commands from the supervisor during clearing procedures. the chamber should be checked to ensure it is not loaded. This rule also minimizes the risk of firing any weapon negligently and also reinforces positive identification of the target. 1. standard procedures to change a weapon’s readiness to fire from one condition to another.NTRP 3-07. This rule enforces the use of the weapons safety feature(s) and reinforces positive identification of the target. security personnel should not change the condition of their weapon unless it appears that the use of deadly force may be necessary. Keep the weapon on safe until you intend to fire. 2 Never point a weapon at anything you do not intend to shoot. This rule enforces the importance of maintaining awareness of the direction the muzzle is aimed and reinforces positive identification of the target. he or she should do so prior to weapons being loaded (during the clearing barrel procedures).2 RULE # 1 SAFETY RULE Treat every weapon as if it were loaded. Every firearm should be considered loaded until it has been examined and proven otherwise. Weapon-specific clearing barrel procedures are defined in individual weapon chapters of this publication.

Figure 1-3. Standardization of these procedures limits the exposure of personnel to hazards inherent in weapons handling and ensures that personnel throughout the Navy handle weapons in a consistent manner.2.2 CONDITION 1 Ammunition is in a position to be fired. Figure 1-2. 2 3 ACTION Not applicable for weapons in this reference. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4. 4 All ammunition is removed. and provides for more efficient use of resources. Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. Ammunition is in position to be chambered. lowers costs. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. Loading and unloading procedures. 1-3 AUG 2003 . General Weapon Condition Codes COMMAND Load Make Ready Load and Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload.NTRP 3-07. ORM administrative and engineering controls are incorporated into the weapons standard operating procedures and guidelines presented in the following chapters. barrel clearing procedures. Safety is on. Safety is on. Standard Weapons Handling Commands ORM seeks to minimize risk to a level commensurate with mission accomplishment. drawing procedures. With a supervisor. Applying the ORM process in both instances reduces mishaps. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. Action is closed. The amount of risk acceptable during an armed conflict is much greater than that during peacetime. Engage the target. Safety is on. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. presenting procedures. Chamber is empty. Chamber is empty. Cease engagement of the target. and remedial action procedures are set forth in a format that facilitates training of personnel to safely and effectively employ Navy weapons. Action is closed.

Formation. Brief personnel on previous watch events.NTRP 3-07. Brief personnel on use of force. Guard Mount Procedures AUG 2003 1-4 . Brief personnel on prevailing force protection condition (FPCON).2 GUARD MOUNT PROCEDURES 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Issue firearms and ammunition. Brief personnel on special orders. Brief personnel on current intelligence. Post personnel to watch stations for turnover. proper equipment. and fitness for duty. Resolve personnel issues and concerns. Conduct muster. clean uniforms. Brief personnel on prevailing rules of engagement (ROE). and expected VIP visits. events. Figure 1-4. Conduct supervised clearing barrel procedures.2. Inspect personnel for neatness. Brief personnel on applicable status of forces agreement (SOFA).

It has a thumb safety mounted on the slide that acts as the decocking lever.S.2 M9 Service Pistol Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics of the M9 are listed in Figure 2-3.NTRP 3-07. M9 Service Pistol Left Side Lanyard Loop 2-1 AUG 2003 . The M9 is a defensive weapon that is typically used at ranges of less than 50 yards. and remedial actions.1. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. NATO M882 round. 2. Navy.2. semiautomatic. It is chambered for the 9mm ball. Slide Stop Slide Decocking/Safety Lever Disassembly Lever Magazine Catch Pistol Grip Figure 2-1. safety features. and can be fired in both double. 2. major components. It is a magazine-fed. shown in Figures 2-1 and 2-2.and single-action modes. cycle of operation. is the standard sidearm for the U. The magazine has a 15-round capacity.1. hand-held weapon. recoil-operated.1 Description of the M9 Service Pistol The M9.1 M9 SERVICE PISTOL DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M9 service pistol and information necessary to understand the M9’s technical characteristics.2 CHAPTER 2 M9 Service Pistol 2.

3 M9 Service Pistol Major Components The M9 has three major component groups: 1.1. 2. M9 Service Pistol Right Side 2. AUG 2003 2-2 .2 Slide and Barrel Assembly The slide and barrel assembly houses the firing pin and extractor and cocks the hammer during the recoil cycle. Magazine assembly. As the last round is fired. This process exerts upward pressure on the slide stop and locks the slide in the rear position. the magazine spring exerts upward pressure on the magazine follower. Receiver assembly (Figure 2-4) 2.1 Receiver Assembly The receiver assembly serves as a support for all major components and controls the action of the pistol through major component functions.3. indicating that the magazine is empty.3 Magazine Assembly The magazine assembly holds 15 cartridges in place for feeding and chambering of ammunition.3. The barrel houses the cartridge for firing and directs the projectile. Slide and barrel assembly (Figure 2-5) 3. 2.1.3.2 Decocking/Safety Lever Hammer Rear Sight Barrel Front Sight Disassembly Button Trigger Magazine Figure 2-2.1.NTRP 3-07.2.1. 2.

3 kg) 165 ft (50 m) 5.54 in (217 mm) 4. M9 Service Pistol Specifications.800 m) In-service date Life expectancy AMMUNITION A363 M882 Ball (only authorized ammunition) A359 Dummy (training purposes only) LOGISTICS 1994 15.2. Logistics.000 rounds TM 9-1005-317-23&P TM 9-1005-317-10 Technical manual # Operator manual # SAFETIES Decocking/safety lever Firing pin block Half-cock notch Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition.4 lb (1.9 kg) 9.97 kg) 8. and Safeties 2-3 AUG 2003 .0 to 6.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Caliber Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (Empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Chamber Pressure Single-Action Trigger Pull Double-Action Trigger Pull Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range M9 1005-01-118-2640 Beretta. USA 0.900 ft (1.8 to 2. Ammunition.1 lb (4.000 PSI (206.NTRP 3-07.5 to 7.843 kPa) 4.9 to 16.230 fps (375 mps) 30. Figure 2-3.35 caliber (9 mm) Double-action semiauto Double-stacked box 15 + 1 rounds 34 ounces (0.92 in (125 mm) 1.

Provides handhold. 1. The holster provides a common.4 M9 Service Pistol Associated Components The holster and lanyard are associated components of the M9. The eight steps in the cycle of operation of the M9 are listed in Figure 2-6. Ejects empty shell casings from ejection port. 2.and left-handed shooters. Retains/releases magazine.1. Slide Stop 1.1 Decocking/Safety Lever The safety permits safe operation of the pistol by both right.5 Cycle of Operation for the M9 Service Pistol It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation of the M9 to ensure it is readily available for action. M9 Service Pistol Receiver Assembly 2. 2. As the safety is moved to the AUG 2003 2-4 . CHARACTERISTICS Figure 2-4. Allows rotation of disassembly lever.NTRP 3-07. unlocking slide from receiver for disassembly. Fixed. Right side of receiver.1. Disassembly Lever Ejector Rotates down. 2.or right-handed shooters. safe method of carrying the M9.2 RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PART Trigger Guard Magazine Well Pistol Grip Trigger Hammer Magazine Catch Protects trigger. Magazine insertion area. 2.6. Initiates firing sequence. Firing pin block 3. Disassembly Button 1. The lanyard prevents loss of physical control of the pistol. 1. 2.1.1. Cocked by double-action trigger squeeze or by rearward movement of the slide. Reversible for left. Decocking/safety lever 2.2. 2. Locks slide rearward (open). 2. Operates manually or automatically by follower when magazine is empty.6 Inherent Safety Features of the M9 Service Pistol The M9 has three safety features (the disconnector serves as an additional internal safety): 1. Half-cock safety notch.

Up position (red dot shows) FIRE. Decocking/Safety Lever 1. 2. M9 Service Pistol Slide and Barrel Assembly 2-5 AUG 2003 . Prevents firing pin from moving forward until trigger is squeezed. 3.2 SLIDE AND BARREL ASSEMBLY PART Slide CHARACTERISTICS 1. Gives indication of round in chamber. Firing pin. 2. and locks the barrel in position during firing. 3. Striker. Rear: notched bar dovetail type. 2. Barrel (rear of barrel is chamber/loading ramp) Recoil Spring The barrel assembly houses the round for firing.NTRP 3-07. Recoil Spring Guide Locking Block Locking Block Plunger Keeps recoil spring straight and properly positioned. 2. Extractor (loaded chamber indicator) 1. 2. Serrated for manual retraction. Returns slide forward. Red top edge. Figure 2-5. 4. Front: blade type. Down position DECOCK/SAFE. Hooks over cartridge case extraction groove. Firing Pin Assembly 1. 2. directs the projectile. 2. Sits in firing pin notch to prevent forward movement of firing pin. Protrudes on right side of slide and can be felt. Pulls round rearward. 1. 4. Fixed Sights 1. Firing Pin Block 1. Moving to DECOCK/SAFE drops hammer without discharging weapon. Releases barrel assembly from slide assembly.2. Locks barrel in position during firing. 5. Absorbs recoil. Cocks hammer during rearward movement. Rotates firing pin striker from any contact with hammer and out of path of firing pin.

1. additional safety that prevents the weapon from firing fully automatic.6.6. allowing the slide to continue rearward. the firing pin striker moves out of alignment with the firing pin. Rearward movement of the slide overrides the hammer and forces the hammer into its most rearward position.3 Half-Cock Safety Notch The half-cock notch interrupts forward movement of the hammer during a mechanical failure. M9 Service Pistol Cycle of Operation safe (down) position. which forces the projectile out of the barrel.6. 2.4 Disconnector The disconnector is an internal. As the trigger is pulled.2. This movement prevents the pistol from firing as the hammer moves forward. the locking block rotates out of the notches in the slide. Locking block lugs move into locking block recesses on the right and left side of the slide.2 Firing Pin Block The firing pin block rests in the firing pin notch and prevents movement of the firing pin until the trigger is pulled. the hammer stops its forward movement at the half-cock notch and prevents the weapon from firing. indicating the pistol is ready to fire. or ammunition malfunction. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor claw.1.NTRP 3-07. If the slide does not return to the full battery position due to a pistol. Cartridge case contacts the ejector and is knocked up and out of the slide’s ejection port. Pushing of the round into the chamber by the face of the slide.1. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. Note The weapon can be fired from the half-cock position by squeezing the trigger. the internal link is not made between the sear and the hammer. As slide assembly moves to the rear. This movement allows a round to be fired when the hammer strikes the firing pin. After firing the weapon.2 STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Stripping of a round from the magazine by the face of the slide. Should one of these conditions occur. magazine. Note In the fire (up) position. Figure 2-6. 2. the trigger must be released to reset the trigger and the link between the sear and hammer. a red dot is visible. 2. This feature prevents the hammer from following the slide forward in the event of a mechanical failure or if the trigger finger is stopped or slips off the trigger during trigger squeeze. AUG 2003 2-6 . the firing pin block moves up and out of the firing pin notch.

An example of a malfunction is a broken front sight. personnel must be trained to quickly assess the cause of the stoppage and take appropriate remedial action to clear it.7.2. 2. the weapon will be removed from the firing line. Raise the nonfiring hand while maintaining muzzle awareness and discipline.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the pistol to fire satisfactorily or to perform as designed. a malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. If the possibility of an audible pop/reduced recoil (defined in paragraph 2.2 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. Learning how to clear stoppages should be accomplished through repetitious training in a sterile training environment where there is no live ammunition present. it does not affect the firing function of the pistol.NTRP 3-07. the line coach will take the ammunition for that stage of fire. Procedures to be used to clear stoppages that occur while on the range and in tactical situations are discussed in the following two sections.1 Clearing a Stoppage During a Navy Handgun Qualification Course When a shooter experiences a stoppage during a Navy handgun qualification course.3. Although the front sight is an important component of the M9. When a malfunction occurs.1. the following steps shall be immediately followed: 1. 2-7 AUG 2003 . Upon completion of the stage of fire. 7. If there is a bore obstruction. 2. with muzzle pointed straight downrange.7. However. 3.1. Stoppages are normally discovered when the pistol will not fire. 5. Wait for the line coach.1. the line coach will take control of the weapon and check for a bore obstruction.7. 4. Some shooter-induced stoppages are listed in Figure 2-7. Although infrequent.3 Clearing Stoppages on the Range Because of safety procedures in place on the range. If the stoppage is shooter-induced. tagged.7 Introduction to Remedial Action The M9 service pistol is an effective and extremely reliable weapon. It is important to understand that there is no one set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur with the M9 service pistol. Remove finger from trigger and place it straight alongside the receiver.2 2. and shipped to Crane Division. Proper care and preventive maintenance will usually ensure pistol serviceability.1.3. 2. Naval Surface Warfare Center. both malfunctions and stoppages do occur. the range safety officer will direct the line coach to make an assessment.7.7. Many stoppages of the M9 pistol occur as a result of shooter error. The line coach will assess the problem that created the stoppage. Trainers should set up drills that encourage personnel to repetitiously practice clearing different types of stoppages. 2.1. Therefore. 6. the pistol must be repaired by an armorer. stoppages are handled differently than when in a tactical environment. 8.1. boxed. 2.2) exists.

) 2.NTRP 3-07. AUG 2003 2-8 . It is normally identifiable by reduced recoil and a lower report. leaving the slide and hammer forward. Get behind cover. Engage decocking/safety lever. personnel should err on the side of safety. 2.3. When the slide is not forward in the battery. check for a bore obstruction only after waiting a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure a hangfire did not occur.2 Clearing a Stoppage During a Practical Weapons Course When a shooter experiences a stoppage during a practical weapons course.2. or if a stovepipe (brass caught between the chamber and the slide) has occurred. This stoppage is sometimes accompanied by excessive smoke escaping from the chamber area.7. b. Audible pop/reduced recoil. The pistol will not cycle. the student shooter. 3. (Clearing the stoppage and firing the remaining rounds will take place off the clock within a reasonable amount of time in order to alleviate additional student/shooter stress. Examples of Shooter-Induced Stoppages 9. Assess what caused the stoppage: a. Remove finger from trigger and place it straight alongside the receiver. under the close supervision of a line coach. the following steps shall be immediately followed: 1. 4. will clear the stoppage and continue to finish the stage of fire. Slide not forward in battery. causing the slide to lock to the rear Figure 2-7. Dirty ammunition or a dirty pistol can cause the slide to not move completely forward. An audible pop occurs when only a portion of the propellant is ignited. When not sure why a stoppage has occurred. it can also be referred to as not fully seated. This can create a dangerous situation where the projectile becomes lodged in the bore.2 TYPICAL SHOOTER-INDUCED STOPPAGES Failing to make ready Failing to take the pistol off safe prior to firing Engaging the safety while firing Engaging the magazine catch while firing Failing to reset the trigger Failing to recognize the pistol has run dry. Before actions are initiated. wait a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure this is not a delay in the primer igniting the propellant (hangfire).1. If the stoppage is the result of the weapon not properly feeding.

4 Clearing Stoppages in Tactical Situations (Only) Remedial action includes investigating the cause of the stoppage. 3.. This is a decision the shooter must make. A double feed occurs when two rounds become lodged in the receiver. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M9 are defined in Figure 2-8. Magazine removed. safety on. Quickly assess cause of stoppage: a. Bring the weapon to a position close to the body while maintaining muzzle awareness. Double feed. 2. Slide not forward in battery. there may not be enough time to permit the shooter to wait 10 seconds. slide forward. Figure 2-8. Remove finger from trigger and place it straight alongside the receiver.7. the shooter should make a quick assessment to determine the cause of the stoppage before attempting to clear it. slide forward. d. Not applicable. the shooter should use some type of field expedient (e. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2. This assessment will determine what steps should be taken to clear the stoppage: 1. clearing the stoppage. 4. round in chamber. c. a cleaning rod) to attempt to clear the obstruction. the first step should be to seek cover (if available). based on cause. safety on. Visually inspect the weapon. 2. chamber empty. Magazine not seated. M9 Service Pistol Weapon Condition Codes 2-9 AUG 2003 . slide forward.2.1. chamber empty. CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Magazine inserted. When performing remedial action in tactical situations (only). b. Magazine inserted. In a hostile situation.g. Stovepipe. 2. Double feed. Once a weapon ceases firing.8 Weapon Condition Codes for the M9 Service Pistol The M9 safety status is defined by one of four weapon condition codes. A stovepipe occurs when the weapon fails to eject the casing. e.2 c. Take appropriate action to reduce stoppage. d.NTRP 3-07. however. safety on. and returning the weapon to operation. It is advisable to wait 10 seconds before checking to see if there is an obstructed bore. Stovepipe. Audible pop/reduced recoil creating an obstructed bore. Note When an obstructed bore is identified in a tactical situation (only).1. causing the brass to be caught between the chamber and the slide.

The weapon is now in Condition 3. remove a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch. 2. Insert the filled magazine into the magazine well. may cause a stoppage. With fingers extended.2. and grease.2 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M9 SERVICE PISTOL ON THE RANGE This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of readiness and operation specific to the M9 service pistol. 2.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. Draw the firing elbow in to facilitate control of the pistol. unloading. 4.1.9 Weapon Handling Commands for the M9 Service Pistol Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. Note Before loading the M9. 2. With the nonfiring hand. check the weapon for dirt. The commands set forth in Figure 2-9. Ensure the pistol is in Condition 4.2. when consistently applied. To ensure the magazine is filled. rotate the pistol so the magazine well is inboard and clearly visible. 3. verifying orientation of magazine with index finger. This step is referred to as indexing the magazine. The extended finger can also act as a guide in lining the magazine up with the magazine well. slide the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the round. push the magazine with the heel of the hand until it is fully seated. when consistently and properly used. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M9. 2.NTRP 3-07. excess oil. and employment of any weapon. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. in turn. will maximize safety during weapon handling and promote the effective employment of the M9. Do not relinquish control of the magazine until it is fully seated. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 3 to Condition 1: AUG 2003 2-10 . The standardized procedures included in this section. Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects.2.2 2. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds which.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol and the pistol pointed in a safe direction. The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 2-9 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. keeping the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well.

With the fingers and thumb of the nonfiring hand. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol and the pistol pointed in a safe direction. Ensure the pistol is in Condition 4. 3. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. Draw the firing elbow in to facilitate control of the pistol. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. 5. 2.2. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4. Cease engagement of the threat.3 Procedures to LOAD AND MAKE READY On the command LOAD AND MAKE READY. Firmly grip the pistol with the firing hand. This action will strip a round from the magazine and chamber it as the slide moves forward. Engage the threat. With a supervisor. Pull the slide to its rearmost position by pushing forward with the firing hand while pulling back on the slide with the nonfiring hand. M9 Service Pistol Weapon Handling Commands 1. 4. To facilitate pulling the slide to the rear. slide the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the 2-11 AUG 2003 . Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. Figure 2-9. with the slide locked to the rear. The protrusion can be felt by sliding a finger or thumb of the nonfiring hand over the top of the slide and across the extractor.2 COMMAND Load Make Ready Load and Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. 4. 2. the upper surface of the extractor protrudes from the right side of the slide. To ensure the magazine is filled. Note When there is a round in the chamber. Release the slide. with the slide in the forward position. rotate the pistol so the magazine well is inboard and clearly visible. Check to ensure a round has been properly chambered by checking the extractor/loaded chamber indicator on the right side of the pistol. Ensure the pistol is pointed in a safe direction. 3. grasp the serrated sides of the slide just forward of the safety. remove a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch.2. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1.NTRP 3-07. rotate the magazine well outboard. With the nonfiring hand. keeping the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. Visually and physically verify that the pistol is clear and safe. This check is effective during both daylight and darkness. 2.

With a straight trigger finger. may cause a stoppage.4 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well. the upper surface of the extractor protrudes from the right side of the slide.2. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds which. Note The safety is disengaged and the finger goes on the trigger only when the sights and muzzle are on target. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. Ensure that the safety is on and that the hammer is forward. With fingers extended.2. The protrusion can be felt by sliding a finger or thumb of the nonfiring hand over the top of the slide and across the extractor. The extended finger can also act as a guide in lining the magazine up with the magazine well. AUG 2003 2-12 . 2.2 round. Insert the filled magazine into the magazine well. 2. 5. verifying orientation of magazine with the index finger. use the nonfiring thumb to take the pistol off safe by releasing the decocking/ safety lever. 2. This check is effective during both daylight and darkness. further described in paragraph 2. in turn.5 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. Do not relinquish control of the magazine until it is fully seated.4. 8. With the trigger finger extended straight along the receiver. release the slide to chamber a round. 7. Assume a carry or transport. This step is referred to as indexing the magazine. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. Remove the finger from the trigger and place it straight along the receiver. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. Visually and physically ensure that the firearm is on safe.2.NTRP 3-07. Note When there is a round in the chamber.2. Place the trigger finger on the trigger and apply pressure to the trigger until the shot is fired. Ensure a round is chambered by physically checking the loaded chamber indicator. push the magazine with the heel of the hand until it is fully seated. Visually and physically verify the slide is fully forward. 6.

3. fully retract the slide and lock it to the rear. fully retract the slide and lock it to the rear. Rotate the pistol so the magazine well is pointed inboard and angled down.2. check to ensure decocking/safety lever is down in the safe position.2. Visually ensure the slide moves forward over an empty chamber. further described in paragraph 2. 7. 8. Press the slide stop to release the slide. Push upward on the slide stop with the firing thumb. SHOW CLEAR. Catch the magazine with the nonfiring hand and stow on person. catch the ejected round with the nonfiring hand. Place the pistol on safe by pressing the decocking/safety lever down. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol. 6. Catch the magazine with the nonfiring hand and stow on person.NTRP 3-07. positioned to catch an ejected round. while maintaining pressure on the stop. At the same time. 4. Assume a carry or transport. 2. Push upward on the slide stop with the firing thumb while maintaining pressure. Depress the magazine catch to remove the magazine from the pistol. 2. 2. 3. Using the thumb of the nonfiring hand. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Depress the magazine catch to remove the magazine from the pistol. Reach over the top of the pistol with the nonfiring hand and grasp the slide serrations. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty. With the pistol pointed in a safe direction. 2. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Reach over the top of the pistol with the nonfiring hand and grasp the slide serrations. 3. catch the ejected round with the nonfiring hand. ensure the pistol is on safe by pressing the decocking/safety lever down. Rotate the pistol so the chamber is outboard. With the pistol pointed in a safe direction. 5. 6. The nonfiring hand should partially cover the ejection port.2. At the same time. The nonfiring hand should partially cover the ejection port. 4. positioned to catch an ejected round. Rotate the pistol so the magazine well is pointed inboard and angled down.7 Procedures to UNLOAD.6 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD.4. 5. 2-13 AUG 2003 .2 2.2. Rotate the pistol so the chamber is outboard. Rotate the pistol so the inside of the chamber is visible. ensure the pistol is on safe by pressing the decocking/safety lever down. 9.

remove a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch. AUG 2003 2-14 . 3. 8.2 7. The clearing barrel supervisor shall read each command slowly and clearly. written clearing barrel procedures shall be posted near the clearing barrel. d.2. Inspect the magazine well and chamber visually to ensure they are empty.1 LOAD AND MAKE READY Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M9 Service Pistol On the supervisor’s command LOAD AND MAKE READY. Slide the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the round to ensure the magazine is filled. Ensure the pistol is on safe. keep the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. c. The second party will: a. Press the slide stop to release the slide. 2.3. b. Load and Make Ready 2. one at a time. with the slide locked to the rear.3 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M9 SERVICE PISTOL AT THE CLEARING BARREL The sole purpose of a clearing barrel is to provide a safe direction in which to point a weapon when performing any or all of the following functions: 1. while closely monitoring the process. follow the directions described below. and the magazine is removed. 4. Clear unnecessary personnel away from clearing barrel. Rotate the pistol so the inside of the chamber is visible.NTRP 3-07. 2. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. The following procedures should always be followed prior to using a clearing barrel: 1. With the nonfiring hand. Take the pistol to administrative transport. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol and the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. Unload. no ammunition is present. Unload 3. Inspect behind/adjacent to clearing barrel. and perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. 2. Show Clear. Visually and physically verify that the firearm is clear and safe. Inspect general condition of clearing barrel. 2. 3. Ensure the pistol is in Condition 4. rotate the pistol so the magazine well is inboard and clearly visible. Have a supervisor inspect the chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. Personnel line up at the clearing barrel and. Visually inspect the pistol’s chamber to ensure it is empty. visually ensure the slide moves forward over an empty chamber. At every duty station. Acknowledge the pistol is clear. while drawing the firing elbow in to facilitate control of the pistol.

Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds which. Visually and physically check the firearm to ensure it is clear and safe. Do not relinquish control of the magazine until it is fully seated. in turn. Hand the round to the clearing barrel supervisor. release the slide to chamber a round. 7.4. further described in paragraph 2. Ensure a round is chambered by physically checking the loaded chamber indicator. verifying orientation of magazine with the index finger. 5.1.2 UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M9 Service Pistol On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. This check is effective during both daylight and darkness. ejecting the chambered round into the cupped hand. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. Turn the firearm over to relief personnel or return it to the armory. With fingers extended. 2-15 AUG 2003 . • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. Ensure the safety is on and the hammer is forward. Note When there is a round in the chamber. Assume a transport. 2. 2. Visually and physically ensure that the firearm is on safe. hold the firearm at a 45-degree angle. 6. may cause a stoppage.2. Insert the filled magazine into the magazine well. With the trigger finger extended straight along the receiver.3. Bring firearm to administrative transport position. lock the slide to the rear. With the nonfiring hand grabbing the slide and cupped over the ejection port. 3. remove the magazine. Visually and physically ensure the pistol is on safe. push the magazine with the heel of the hand until it is fully seated. The protrusion can be felt by sliding a finger or thumb of the nonfiring hand over the top of the slide and across the extractor. With the muzzle pointed into the clearing barrel. the upper surface of the extractor protrudes from the right side of the slide. making sure the magazine well and chamber are empty. and perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. and hand it to the clearing barrel supervisor. keep the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel.) 4. Visually and physically verify the slide is fully forward. depress the magazine catch.2.2 5. 8. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well. With the nonfiring thumb. if present. (A safe-eject device may be used for this step.NTRP 3-07.

3. 3. Visually and physically ensure the pistol is on safe. depress the magazine catch and remove the magazine. with the slide locked to the rear. 2. 6. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. when consistently applied. ejecting the chambered round into the cupped hand.4. 2.NTRP 3-07. 2. ensuring the pistol is on safe. making sure the magazine well and chamber are empty. With the muzzle pointed into the clearing barrel. AUG 2003 2-16 . if present. the following procedures shall be observed. Grasp the pistol firmly in the firing hand.) 4.1 Show Clear Transfer for the M9 Service Pistol A show clear transfer is usually conducted at guard mount when weapons are issued. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty. Turn the firearm over to relief personnel or return it to the armory. keep the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. Hand the round to the clearing barrel supervisor. Leave the slide locked to the rear. Hand it to the clearing barrel supervisor. hold the firearm at a 45-degree angle. (A safe-eject device may be used for this step.1. 2. Allow for a secondary inspection by the supervisor. 4.2. will promote the safe handling of the M9 between personnel and during movement with the weapon. With the nonfiring hand grabbing the slide and cupped over the ejection port. Bring firearm to administrative transport position. Remove the magazine. and perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1.4 M9 SERVICE PISTOL SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific procedures that. Visually and physically check the firearm to ensure it is clear and safe.3 UNLOAD. Note Whenever an M9 service pistol is transferred or returned to the armory it should be in Condition 4. 3. SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M9 Service Pistol On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. With the nonfiring thumb. SHOW CLEAR. with the slide locked to the rear. 2. 2.4.2 Note Whenever an M9 service pistol is transferred or returned to the armory it should be in Condition 4. To transfer the pistol using the show clear method. lock the slide to the rear.1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon Personnel transferring the weapon shall: 1. 5. Lock the slide to the rear and catch the round (if there is a round in the chamber).

If using a holster with a flap.2 5. The wrist should be straight so the muzzle of the pistol is pointing in an upward direction. The procedures for transporting and carrying the M9 follow. lift the flap of the holster with the nonfiring hand. 3. Grasp the pistol grip. Keep the muzzle pointed at an upward 45-degree angle and in a safe direction. The holster transport is used when there is no immediate threat (i.2. while concurrently staying prepared to engage a threat. Ensure the pistol is on safe. Ensure the pistol is on safe. b. hand the pistol — grip first —to the receiving person. enemy contact is remote).2.4. the slide is locked to the rear. 2.1 M9 Service Pistol Transports The M9 can be transported using one of two methods: the holster transport or the administrative transport. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol grip. and the trigger finger is straight along the receiver. Cradle the trigger guard in the palm of the nonfiring hand and wrap the fingers of the nonfiring hand around the slide.1. 2. 2. the slide is forward. To transport the pistol: 1. Bring the pistol to a position above the holster and rotate the muzzle down into the holster. place the pistol in the holster using the following steps: a. Push the pistol snugly into the holster and.4. 6.1. c. 2.. 3. if equipped with a flap.1.NTRP 3-07.1 Holster Transport The holster transport is the most common method of carrying the M9 because the pistol can be transported safely in the holster. ensuring the trigger finger is straight along the receiver. 2. To place the pistol in the holster: 1. Bend the elbow to approximately an upward 45-degree angle so the pistol is positioned near shoulder level.2. establish a firm grip around the pistol grip.4. the magazine is removed. 2. 2-17 AUG 2003 . fasten the flap with the firing hand.2. 2. the chamber is empty. and the trigger finger is straight along the receiver.4. 2.2 Administrative Transport The administrative transport method is used when personnel do not have a holster. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty.e. Ensure the safety is on. With the chamber exposed.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M9 Service Pistol Specific instruction governing the movement of the M9 will ensure personnel move safely with the weapon. With the firing hand.2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon Personnel receiving the weapon shall: 1.4.

Avoid wasted motion.NTRP 3-07. 2. Concentrate on a smooth. Both carries permit quick engagement when necessary. Grasp the pistol grip firmly with two hands.2.2. around cover.e. 2.2.2. 2..4.4.4. Proper technique must first be learned. AND RELOADING THE M9 SERVICE PISTOL Specific instruction in drawing and reloading the M9 will ensure quick and sustainable engagement of a target. and reloading the M9 follow. 3.2.2 2.g. Four drawing technique stages are outlined in Figure 2-10. Drawing techniques are listed as follows: 1. the following drawing technique will allow the shooter to acquire the target. HOLSTERING.1 Drawing In order to engage a target quickly from the holster. 2. which is time consuming.1 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when enemy contact is likely (i.. There are two carries for the M9: the alert and the ready. The procedures for drawing.5. and begin the trigger squeeze within 1 second. Note Bending the elbows is advantageous in close-quarter environments (e. To perform the alert carry: 1. Grasp the pistol grip firmly with two hands. probable). indoors. 2.2 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when there is no target but contact with the enemy is imminent. in or around a vehicle) and for additional control when moving.5 DRAWING. Keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. Ensure the pistol is on safe. line up the sights.2. Speed will naturally follow. The elbows can be bent during the alert carry. To perform the ready carry: 1. 3. the shooter must find the shortest and quickest method of getting the firearm from the holster to the target. Extend the arms and raise the pistol to just below eye level so a clear field of view is maintained. AUG 2003 2-18 . 2. 4. safe-flowing motion. Ensure the pistol is on safe. If practiced repeatedly. Technique is taught in stages for clarity. Keep the trigger finger straight along the receiver. Extend the arms downward at approximately a 45-degree angle to the body. 3. remove the slack from the trigger. The consistent use of correct holstering techniques will ensure the return of the pistol to a safe carry. 2. Do not attempt to draw fast when first learning this technique. holstering.2 M9 Service Pistol Carries Weapons carries are designed to place personnel in a state of increased readiness as the threat level increases.

3. Ensure the nonfiring hand is not muzzled during this step. If utilizing a holster with a flap. Use the firing hand to holster while keeping flap secured against the body with the nonfiring hand. Just prior to holstering. reach over to holster with the nonfiring hand and lift flap. Keep trigger finger out of trigger guard. 4. if applicable. 4.2. 3. 2. in front of firing hip. M9 Service Pistol Drawing Technique Stages 2. on target. 5. b.5. Begin trigger squeeze.NTRP 3-07. Thrust weapon forward toward target. Note If utilizing a flapped holster. SMACK 1. the user should be able to return the weapon without looking at the holster. Both hands come together (SMACK) while leaving the nonfiring thumb in a position to sweep safety off. review the following procedures to ensure weapon is in safe configuration: a. To maintain situational awareness. 1. Engage decocking/safety lever. c. use the nonfiring hand to hold flap of holster against the side of the body. sweep safety off with nonfiring thumb while maintaining a proper grip. Place finger on trigger. 6. 3. No time for adjustments after the pistol is drawn. 2-19 AUG 2003 . Hammer is forward and covered by thumb. If holster does not have a flap.2 DRAW GRAB TECHNIQUE 1. 2. Holstered grip is grip to shoot with. Figure 2-10. Move the nonfiring hand toward firing side. LOOK AND SQUEEZE 1. Firing hand grips pistol while it is in holster. the nonfiring hand is free. Finger is outside of trigger guard and straight along the receiver. Eye focus is center of mass on target. 2. Change eye focus from target to front sight. 3. 2. 3. DRAW 1. Cover hammer with thumb. 2. As the front sight approaches center of mass.2 Holstering A weapon should be drawn quickly and returned slowly. Take up slack. Remove finger from trigger. Lift pistol up until muzzle cleanly clears holster. Safety is engaged. Rotate muzzle toward target by dropping firing side elbow until muzzle is downrange toward target.

Reach for a new magazine with the nonfiring hand. Depress magazine catch. b. c.2. 1. Ensure object sight alignment. b. Reestablish two-handed grip. d. c. Release slide stop as weapon is coming up on target. M9 Service Pistol Reload AUG 2003 2-20 . Bend firing arm to facilitate reloading. obtain new magazine. Figure 2-11.5. Remove trigger finger to the outside of trigger guard. a. A smooth. which allows a quick reload in darkness or by feel in low light situations. 6. Keep knife edge of hand away from the body. Allow empty magazine to fall to deck. Keep index finger on round portion. Keep thumb on flat portion. b. safe-flowing motion improves the speed of unloading/reloading.2 2. Use of the following procedure will ensure a smooth and safe unload/reload technique. a. Extend nonfiring index finger and place along round portion of magazine and projectile. The user should maintain 25 percent of vision on the weapon and 75 percent on the target. and trigger squeeze occur simultaneously. 3.3 Unload/Reload The objective in a tactical situation is to quickly unload/reload and reengage the target. Shift 100 percent of vision to front sight. Fully seat magazine.NTRP 3-07. Insert magazine into magazine well. palm down. Use the FAST/SLOW/FAST reload concept (seen in Figure 2-11) in a tactical (only) situation. sight picture. Align and place magazine into magazine well. Ensure magazine is fully seated. straight along the receiver. 4. e. Rotate weapon slightly toward the nonfiring side to see into magazine well. 7. Feel for rounded portion of front of grip with tip of finger. c. 2. 5. SPEED FAST SLOW FAST PROCEDURE Release old magazine. a.

6 M9 SERVICE PISTOL ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M9 (with slide locked to the rear) is issued from and returned to the armory.8 M9 SERVICE PISTOL SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on pistol marksmanship refer to MCRP 301B. assembly. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operators Manual. SW 370-AA-OPI-010/9mm. 2.2 2. 2. 2-21 AUG 2003 . and function check of the M9 service pistol.2.NTRP 3-07.7 M9 SERVICE PISTOL DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly.

2.NTRP 3-07.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 2-22 .

Navy forces. major components. NATO M882 round. hand-held weapon that is chambered for the 9mm ball. It can be fired in both double. 3.NTRP 3-07. semiautomatic. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling.S. is a defensive weapon typically used at ranges of less than 50 yards. M11 Service Pistol Left Side 3-1 AUG 2003 . the pistol will fire with the hammer in either the down or the cocked position. with a 13-round magazine capacity.1 Description of the M11 Service Pistol The M11 (see Figures 3-1 and 3-2) is the standard concealable sidearm for U. and remedial actions. The weapon has no external safety and will only fire when the trigger is squeezed.1 M11 SERVICE PISTOL DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M11 service pistol and information necessary to understand the M11’s technical characteristics. with a round in the chamber. recoiloperated. It is a magazine-fed. safety features. The double-action trigger and the absence of a manual safety provide immediate first-shot potential. cycle of operation. Barrel Decocking Lever Slide Stop Disassembly Lever Magazine Catch Pistol Grip Figure 3-1. Therefore.2.and single-action modes.1. The M11.2 CHAPTER 3 M11 Service Pistol 3.

AUG 2003 3-2 .2 Fixed Tritium Sights Hammer Slide Trigger Magazine Figure 3-2.1.3. 3. The magazine assembly.3 M11 Service Pistol Major Components The M11 has three major component groups: 1. The receiver assembly (see Figure 3-4) 2. 3. Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition.1.2 M11 Service Pistol Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M11 are listed in Figure 3-3.1 Receiver Assembly The receiver assembly serves as a support for all major components and controls the action of the pistol through the major components.2. The slide and barrel assembly (see Figure 3-5) 3.NTRP 3-07. M11 Service Pistol Right Side 3.1.

355 (9 mm) Double-action semiauto Double-stacked box 13 + 1 rounds 26 ounces (0. and Safeties 3.NTRP 3-07. the pistol and the surrounding air may be contaminated with tritium. M11 Service Pistol Specifications.2. The barrel houses the cartridge for firing and directs the projectile.74 kg) 7. Logistics.800 m) Firing pin safety lock Safety intercept notch SAFETIES In-service date Life expectancy Technical manual # Operator manual # LOGISTICS 1994 15.5 kg) 150 ft (46 m) 5.3.2 Slide and Barrel Assembly The slide and barrel assembly houses the firing pin and extractor and cocks the hammer during the recoil cycle.230 fps (375 mps) 30.08 in (180 mm) 3.” A check for illumination of the M11 pistol sights is to be made on a daily basis prior to use. replace.000 PSI (206. USA Manufacturer Caliber Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (Empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Chamber Pressure Single-Action Trigger Pull Double-Action Trigger Pull Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range 0. Radioactive self-luminous sources are identified by means of a letter “T. 3-3 AUG 2003 . Ammunition. Notify the local radiation protection officer or local safety office.12 lb (5.1.000 rounds TM 9-1005-325-23&P TM 9-1005-325-10 Figure 3-3.86 in (98 mm) 1. or fix the sights. The radioactive material used in the M11 9mm pistol sights is tritium gas (H3) sealed in Pyrex tubes.4 lb (2 kg) 12. Do not attempt to remove. If not illuminated.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN NSN w/ Tritium Sights AMMUNITION A363 M882 Ball (only authorized ammunition) A359 Dummy (training purposes only) M11 1005-01-336-8265 Tritium 1005-01-340-0096 SigArms.843 kPa) 4.900 ft (1.

1. 1.2 RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PART Trigger Guard Magazine Well Pistol Grip Trigger Hammer Magazine Catch Protects trigger. the magazine spring exerts upward pressure on the magazine follower.NTRP 3-07.1. This process exerts upward pressure on the slide stop and locks the slide in the rear position. The eight steps in the cycle of operation of the M11 are listed in Figure 3-6. Initiates firing sequence. Thumbing down the decocking lever moves the sear out of register with the hammer’s single-action notch. 3. Slide Stop 1. Fixed. serves as an additional internal safety. M11 Service Pistol Receiver Assembly 3. Disassembly Lever Ejector Unlocks for disassembly. Operates manually or automatically by follower when magazine is empty. Provides handhold.5 Cycle of Operation for the M11 Service Pistol It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation to ensure the M11 pistol is readily available for action. 2. The holster provides a common. 2. During this AUG 2003 3-4 .3. 3. Decocking Lever Safely lowers the hammer into the safety intercept notch. safe method of carrying the M11.3. Magazine insertion area. and Hammer Reset Spring The decocking lever allows the cocked hammer to be safely lowered into the safety intercept notch.or right-handed shooters. As the last round is fired. The hammer is held by the sear engaging in the safety intercept notch.1. CHARACTERISTICS Figure 3-4. Safety Intercept Notch. 1.1. Locks slide rearward (open). Retains/releases magazine.1. The hammer then drops forward and the decocking lever returns to its original position. 3.6.4 M11 Service Pistol Associated Components The holster is an associated component of the M11.2. outlined in paragraph 3.6 Inherent Safety Features of the M11 Service Pistol The M11 has two safety features: the decocking lever and the firing pin safety lock. 2. 3. The safety intercept notch is the rest position of the hammer in the double-action position. The disconnector.3 Magazine Assembly The magazine assembly holds 13 cartridges in place for feeding and chambering of ammunition. Ejects empty shell casings from ejection port. Reversible for left.6. Cocked by double-action trigger squeeze or by rearward movement of the slide.1.1 Decocking Lever. indicating that the magazine is empty.

Extractor. Recoil Spring Guide Keeps recoil spring straight and properly positioned.6. Cocks hammer during rearward movement. the trigger bar is drawn forward. 3. Rear: notched dovetail type. The firing pin is locked in the slide by the safety lock. the blowback action forces the slide and barrel assembly rearward. 3. Fixed Tritium Sights 1. Front: blade type. as well as releasing the sear.1. Returns slide forward. allowing the firing pin and firing pin safety lock to reset to the locked position. 3. the firing pin spring retracts the firing pin. This allows engagement of the safety lock during each cycle of operation. Proper care and preventive maintenance will usually ensure the pistol’s serviceability.7 Introduction to Remedial Action The M11 service pistol is an effective and extremely reliable weapon. Firing pin. Although infrequent. Rear of barrel is chamber/loading ramp. ensuring constant engagement of the safety intercept notch (except when firing). lifts the safety lock to free the firing pin.1. both malfunctions and stoppages do occur. When the trigger is pulled. Breech Block Assembly 1. even if pistol is dropped. After each shot.2. 2. 2. The slide disconnects the trigger bar from the safety lever. Firing Pin Safety Lock When trigger is not squeezed.2 Firing Pin Safety Lock The automatic firing pin lock provides optimal safety with the hammer in either the cocked or decocked position. 2. The hammer reset spring maintains contact with the hammer. Serrated for manual retraction. 2. Barrel Recoil Spring Figure 3-5. This pivots the safety lever.6. Prevents firing pin from moving forward until trigger is squeezed. 3. the safety lever remains in its rest position and does not lift the safety lock. Radioactive self-luminous. When the trigger is pulled in the single-action mode. 1.NTRP 3-07. 3-5 AUG 2003 .1. The sear returns to its initial position and holds the hammer as the slide goes forward. M11 Service Pistol Slide and Barrel Assembly operation. and moves the sear to release the hammer.2 SLIDE AND BARREL ASSEMBLY PART Slide CHARACTERISTICS 1. secures firing pin and prevents it from moving forward. Absorbs recoil. the trigger bar pivots the safety lever to raise the safety lock and free the firing pin immediately prior to releasing the hammer.3 Disconnector Operation Upon firing.

Extracting Ejecting Cocking Figure 3-6. An example of a malfunction is a broken front sight. personnel must be trained to quickly assess the cause of the stoppage and take appropriate remedial action to clear it. Remove finger from the trigger and place it straight alongside the receiver.1. Although it is an important component of the M11.7. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor claw. 3. Therefore. Trainers should set up drills that encourage personnel to repeatedly practice clearing different types of stoppages. Common shooter-induced stoppages are listed in Figure 3-7.1.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the pistol to fire satisfactorily or to perform as designed. a malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. the following steps shall be followed immediately: 1. Cartridge case contacts the ejector and is knocked up and out of the slide’s ejection port.2. There is no single set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur with the M11 service pistol. Learning how to clear stoppages should be accomplished through repetitious training in a sterile training environment where there is no live ammunition present. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. After firing. Stoppages are normally discovered when the pistol will not fire. However.7.2 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. Many stoppages of the M11 pistol occur as a result of shooter error.3 Clearing Stoppages on the Range Because of safety procedures in place on the range. When a malfunction occurs.2 STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking ACTION Stripping of a round from the magazine by the face of the slide.3. Procedures to be used to clear stoppages that occur while on the range and in tactical situations are discussed in the following two sections.1.NTRP 3-07. which forces the projectile out of the barrel. 3.7. AUG 2003 3-6 .7.1. M11 Service Pistol Cycle of Operation 3.1 Clearing a Stoppage During a Navy Handgun Qualification Course When a shooter experiences a stoppage during a Navy handgun qualification course. Pushing of the round into the chamber by the face of the slide. Rearward movement of the slide overrides the hammer and forces the hammer into its most rearward position. the barrel is cammed down and held by the locking insert. personnel shall handle stoppages differently than when in tactical situations. it does not affect the firing function of the pistol. Barrel is seated on the upper step of the locking insert and is locked into the slide. The slide continues rearward. 3. After recoiling approximately 1/8 inch. the pistol must be repaired by an armorer. blowback action forces the slide and barrel assembly rearward against the recoil spring.

causing the slide to lock to the rear.NTRP 3-07.2. Figure 3-7. will clear the stoppage and continue to finish the stage of fire. The line coach will assess the problem that created the stoppage. Upon completion of the stage of fire. Wait for a line coach. Engaging the magazine catch while firing. 6.1.2 Clearing a Stoppage During a Practical Weapons Course When a shooter experiences a stoppage during a practical weapons course. (Clearing the stoppage and firing the remaining rounds will take place off the clock within a reasonable amount of time to alleviate additional student/shooter stress. Failing to reset the trigger. Examples of Shooter-Induced Stoppages 2. 3.) 3.7. or if a stovepipe (brass caught between the chamber and the slide) has occurred. the range safety officer will direct the line coach to make an assessment. under the close supervision of a line coach. If the stoppage is shooter-induced. If there is a bore obstruction. 9. 3-7 AUG 2003 . Raise the nonfiring hand while maintaining muzzle awareness and discipline. Keep the muzzle pointed straight downrange. the weapon will be removed from the firing line. Assess what caused the stoppage. the line coach will take the ammunition for that stage of fire. 4. the following steps shall be followed immediately: 1. 8.1. and shipped to Crane Division. boxed.7. the student shooter. If the possibility of an audible pop/reduced recoil (see paragraph 3. 3.2 TYPICAL SHOOTER-INDUCED STOPPAGES Failing to make ready.3. 7.2) exists. Engage decocking lever. Remove finger from the trigger and place it straight alongside the receiver. 5. Failing to recognize the pistol has run dry.3. Get behind cover. the line coach will take control of the weapon and check for a bore obstruction. 4. Naval Surface Warfare Center. tagged. If the stoppage is the result of the weapon not properly feeding. 2.

a cleaning rod) to attempt to clear the obstruction. When the slide is not forward in the battery.g. An audible pop occurs when only a portion of the propellant is ignited. however. When performing remedial action in tactical situations (only). clearing the stoppage. This stoppage is sometimes accompanied by excessive smoke escaping from the chamber area.4 Clearing Stoppages in Tactical Situations (Only) Remedial action includes investigating the cause of the stoppage.2 a. the shooter should make a quick assessment to determine the cause of the stoppage before attempting to clear it. creating an obstructed bore. Visually inspect the weapon. leaving the slide and hammer forward. Dirty ammunition or a dirty pistol can cause the slide to not move completely forward. the first step should be to seek cover (if available). based on cause. and returning the weapon to operation. This can create a dangerous situation where the projectile becomes lodged in the bore. Audible pop/reduced recoil. b. It is advisable to wait 10 seconds before checking to see if there is an obstructed bore. Magazine not seated. 3. Audible pop/reduced recoil. This is a decision the shooter must make. Double feed. Slide not forward in battery. c.2.7. Take appropriate action to reduce stoppage.NTRP 3-07. Quickly assess cause of stoppage: a. 4. d. d. causing the brass to be caught between the chamber and the slide. In a hostile situation. Slide not forward in battery. personnel should err on the side of safety. Note When an obstructed bore is identified in a tactical situation (only). Remove finger from trigger and place it straight alongside the receiver. there may not be enough time to permit the shooter to wait 10 seconds.1. Bring weapon to a position close to body while maintaining muzzle awareness. AUG 2003 3-8 . Stovepipe. wait a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure there is not a delay in the primer igniting the propellant (hangfire). Once a weapon ceases firing. it can also be referred to as not fully seated. This assessment will determine what steps should be taken to clear the stoppage: 1. b. When not sure why a stoppage has occurred. Before actions are initiated. A double feed occurs when two rounds become lodged in the receiver. The pistol will not cycle. Stovepipe. e. the shooter should use some type of field expedient (e. 2. Check for a bore obstruction only after waiting a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure a hangfire did not occur. It is normally identifiable by reduced recoil and a lower report. A stovepipe occurs when the weapon fails to eject the casing. 3. Double feed. c.

Weapon condition codes applicable to the M11 are defined in Figure 3-8.1. 3.8 Weapon Condition Codes for the M11 Service Pistol The M11 safety status is defined by one of four weapon condition codes.2. Figure 3-8. CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Magazine inserted. excess oil.2. slide forward. Magazine removed. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. and grease. M11 Service Pistol Weapon Condition Codes 3-9 AUG 2003 . Ensure the pistol is in Condition 4. Not applicable. when consistently and properly used. round in chamber. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. check the weapon for dirt. The commands set forth in Figure 3-9.NTRP 3-07. and hammer forward. chamber empty. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol and the pistol pointed in a safe direction. 2. This step is referred to as indexing the magazine. remove a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch. Draw the firing elbow in to facilitate control of the pistol. slide forward. The extended finger can also act as a guide in lining the magazine up with the magazine well. when consistently applied.1. 3. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2.9 Weapon Handling Commands for the M11 Service Pistol Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. Note Before loading the M11. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M11. Magazine inserted. 3. Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects. will maximize safety during weapon handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon. The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 3-9 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. rotate the pistol so the magazine well is inboard and clearly visible.2 3. Slide the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the round to ensure the magazine is filled. With the nonfiring hand. slide forward. and employment of any weapon. and hammer forward. chamber empty. unloading. and hammer forward.2 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M11 SERVICE PISTOL ON THE RANGE This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of readiness and operation specific to the M11 service pistol. The standardized procedures included in this section. 3.

push the magazine with the heel of the hand until it is fully seated. verifying orientation of magazine with the index finger. Note Ensure the weapon is decocked at this time by pressing the decocking lever down. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1.2 COMMAND Load Make Ready Load and Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. may cause a stoppage. With fingers extended. The weapon is now in Condition 3. M11 Service Pistol Weapon Handling Commands 4. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. Cease engagement of the target. 3. Engage the target. Figure 3-9. AUG 2003 3-10 . 2. 3. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well. Pull the slide to its rearmost position by pushing forward with the firing hand and pulling back on the slide with the nonfiring hand. Release the slide. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. With a supervisor.NTRP 3-07.2. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. Do not relinquish control of the magazine until it is fully seated. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1.2. Ensure the pistol is pointed in a safe direction and the slide is in the forward position. Ensure the trigger finger is outside of the trigger guard and straight along the receiver. Grasp the serrated sides of the slide with the fingers and thumb of the nonfiring hand. Firmly grip the pistol with the firing hand. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put into Condition 4. in turn. Insert the filled magazine into the magazine well. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds which. This action will strip a round from the magazine and chamber it as the slide moves forward. 4.

NTRP 3-07. straight along the receiver. draw the weapon. When the muzzle and sights are on the target. 2.2. 5. 3. 3-11 AUG 2003 . Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds which. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1.2. Note Ensure the weapon is decocked at this time by pressing the decocking lever down. Slide the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the round to ensure the magazine is filled. Ensure the pistol is in Condition 4 with the slide locked to the rear. 2. Draw the firing elbow in to facilitate control of the pistol. Keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction.4 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE. chambering a round. With the nonfiring hand. and remaining rounds will be fired single-action. which will decock the hammer. Depress the decocking lever. Keeping the trigger finger straight. push the magazine with the heel of the hand until it is fully seated. Visually and physically verify the slide is fully forward. The first round will be fired double-action. Ensure hammer is forward and assume a carry or transport (see paragraph 3. This step is referred to as indexing the magazine. Ensure the trigger finger is outside of the trigger guard and straight along the receiver. rotate the pistol so the magazine well is inboard and clearly visible. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1.2 3. 8.2).2. With fingers extended. The extended finger can also act as a guide in lining the magazine up with the magazine well. verifying orientation of magazine with the index finger. Visually and physically verify that the pistol is clear and safe. Release the slide.3 Procedures to LOAD AND MAKE READY On the command LOAD AND MAKE READY. Apply pressure to the trigger until the shot is fired. 6. Ensure the trigger finger is outside the trigger guard. Insert the filled magazine into the magazine well. place the trigger finger on the trigger. Do not relinquish control of the magazine until it is fully seated. 7. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well. remove a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch. in turn.4. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. 3. 4. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol and the pistol pointed in a safe direction. may cause a stoppage.

Push upward on the slide stop with the firing thumb and maintain pressure. Rotate the pistol so the inside of the chamber is visible. 3. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. SHOW CLEAR. AUG 2003 3-12 .2. ensure the hammer is forward. Press the decocking lever down with the nonfiring thumb. 6.2. Visually ensure the slide moves forward over an empty chamber.2 3. With the pistol pointed in a safe direction. Depress the magazine catch to remove the magazine from the pistol. 2. The nonfiring hand should partially cover the ejection port. positioned to catch an ejected round. 3. 5. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol. Catch the magazine with the nonfiring hand and stow on person. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Depress the magazine catch to remove the magazine from the pistol.5 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE.2. Reach over the top of the pistol with the nonfiring hand and grasp the slide serrations.2. 3. Depress the decocking lever to decock the weapon and lower the hammer.6 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD. Catch the magazine with the nonfiring hand and stow on person. 2.2). The nonfiring hand should partially cover the ejection port. Remove the finger from the trigger and place it straight along the receiver. 2. Rotate the pistol so the chamber is outboard. 8. 7.7 Procedures to UNLOAD. Press the slide stop to release the slide. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. 9. 4. Rotate the pistol so the chamber is outboard. positioned to catch an ejected round. 3. 4.4. Assume a carry or transport (see paragraph 3. catch the ejected round with the nonfiring hand. Reach over the top of the pistol with the nonfiring hand and grasp the slide serrations. ensure the pistol is decocked. At the same time. Rotate the pistol so the magazine well is pointed inboard and angled down. fully retract the slide and lock it to the rear. Inspect the magazine well and chamber visually to ensure they are empty. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol.NTRP 3-07. 3. 5. Push upward on the slide stop with the firing thumb and maintain pressure. Rotate the pistol so the magazine well is pointed inboard and angled down.

no ammunition is present. Have a supervisor inspect the chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. At every duty station. The clearing barrel supervisor will read each command slowly and clearly. follow the directions described below. Inspect the magazine well and chamber visually to ensure they are empty. 3. Personnel line up at the clearing barrel and. Visually and physically verify that the pistol is clear and safe. With the pistol pointed in a safe direction. The following procedures should always be followed prior to using a clearing barrel: 1. Inspect behind/adjacent to clearing barrel. lowering the hammer. remove a filled magazine from the ammunition pouch. Draw the firing elbow in to facilitate control of the pistol. catch the ejected round with the nonfiring hand. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. With the nonfiring hand. and the magazine is removed. The supervisor will: a.3 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M11 SERVICE PISTOL AT THE CLEARING BARREL The sole purpose of a clearing barrel is to provide a safe direction in which to point a weapon when performing any or all of the following functions: load and make ready. 3. Visually inspect the chamber to ensure it is empty. 2. unload.3. Inspect general condition of clearing barrel. 8. Rotate the pistol so the inside of the chamber is visible. Ensure the pistol is in Condition 4. with the slide locked to the rear. 4. 3. keep the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. while closely monitoring the process. 3. 3-13 AUG 2003 . rotate the pistol so the magazine well is inboard and clearly visible. At the same time. Clear unnecessary personnel away from clearing barrel. Take the pistol to administrative transport. 7. one at a time. fully retract the slide and lock it to the rear. Slide the index finger along the forward edge of the magazine until the finger is touching the tip of the round to ensure the magazine is filled. written clearing barrel procedures shall be posted near the clearing barrel. or unload. Press the slide stop to release the slide.1 LOAD AND MAKE READY Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M11 Service Pistol On the supervisor’s command LOAD AND MAKE READY.NTRP 3-07. Acknowledge the pistol is clear. b. 2. and perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. c.2 6.2. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol and the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. Visually ensure the slide moves forward over an empty chamber and decock the weapon by pressing the decocking lever down. show clear.

Visually and physically verify the slide is fully forward. in turn. With fingers extended. 2. Ensure the weapon is decocked.2 UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M11 Service Pistol On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty. and perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. keep the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. Depress the decocking lever. Lock the slide to the rear and catch the ejected round. 5. 7. Ensure the weapon is decocked. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. Remove the magazine and stow on person.2. 7. 4. and perform the following steps to take the pistol from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Remove the magazine and stow on person. Ensure the trigger finger is outside the trigger guard.3. 3. Decock weapon by pressing decocking lever down and lowering the hammer. keep the pistol pointed in the clearing barrel. 3. SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M11 Service Pistol On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. 6. may cause a stoppage. Insert the filled magazine into the magazine well. Release the slide to chamber a round. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. 2. 8. straight along the receiver. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure both are empty. Ensure hammer is forward and assume a transport (see paragraph 3. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well.2. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds which. 3.2 5.NTRP 3-07. 6.3. Lock the slide to the rear and catch the ejected round.3 UNLOAD. AUG 2003 3-14 . 4. verifying orientation of the magazine with the index finger. which will decock the hammer. 3. SHOW CLEAR.1). Release the slide and observe it going forward on an empty chamber. Do not relinquish control of the magazine until it is fully seated. push the magazine with the heel of the hand until it is fully seated.4. Holster the weapon or return it to the armory in Condition 4 with the slide locked to the rear.

1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon Personnel transferring the weapon shall: 1. transfer. 3.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M11 Service Pistol Specific instructions governing the movement of the M11 will ensure personnel move safely with the weapon while staying prepared to engage a threat. With the chamber exposed.4. when consistently applied. Note Whenever an M11 pistol is transferred or returned to the armory it should be in Condition 4. Ensure the pistol is decocked. 3.NTRP 3-07. Bring the firearm to administrative transport position.1. 2. 2.4.2 5. and movement with the M11. 3. The procedures for transporting and carrying the M11 follow. ensuring the trigger finger is straight along the receiver.2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon Personnel receiving the weapon shall: 1. Keep the muzzle pointed at an upward 45-degree angle and in a safe direction. 6. 5. To transfer the pistol using the show clear method. 3. Visually inspect the chamber to ensure it is empty. the following procedures shall be observed. 3. 3. 3-15 AUG 2003 .4. Leave the slide locked to the rear.4 M11 SERVICE PISTOL SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific procedures that. 3. Cradle the trigger guard in the palm of the nonfiring hand and wrap the fingers of the nonfiring hand around the slide. Grasp the pistol firmly in the firing hand.1 Show Clear Transfer for the M11 Service Pistol A show clear transfer is usually conducted at guard mount when weapons are issued. 4. Allow for a secondary inspection by a supervisor. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty. Lock the slide to the rear and catch the round (if there is a round in the chamber). will promote safe handling. 6. hand the pistol — grip first —to the receiving person.1 M11 Service Pistol Transports The M11 can be transported using one of two methods: the holster transport or the administrative transport.1. Grasp the pistol grip.2.4.4. with the slide locked to the rear. Turn it over to relief personnel or return it to the armory. Remove the magazine.2.

To perform the alert carry: 1.2 Administrative Transport The administrative transport method is used when personnel do not have a holster.NTRP 3-07. The holster transport is used when there is no immediate threat (i.2. With the firing hand. and the trigger finger is straight along the receiver.4. 3. place the pistol in the holster using the following steps: a. enemy contact is remote). Never holster the weapon with the hammer cocked to the rear. 2. The wrist should be straight so that the muzzle of the pistol is pointing in an upward direction. Push the pistol snugly into the holster and fasten the flap with the firing hand. b.2 M11 Service Pistol Carries Weapons carries are designed to place personnel in a state of increased readiness as the threat level increases. Grasp the pistol grip firmly with two hands. the chamber is empty.1 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when enemy contact is likely (i.2. To transport the pistol: 1.1. 3.1..2. establish a firm grip around the pistol grip. 2. ensure that the decocking lever is depressed to lower the hammer into the safety intercept notch. Bring the pistol to a position above the holster and rotate the muzzle down into the holster. 3. the slide is locked to the rear. 2. Extend the arms downward at approximately a 45-degree angle to the body. There are two carries for the M11 pistol: the alert and the ready.4. Decock the pistol. Decock the pistol.4.. During this procedure the firing pin remains automatically locked. 3.1 Holster Transport The holster transport is the most common and safest method of carrying the M11. Both carries permit quick engagement when necessary.2.2. AUG 2003 3-16 . To place the pistol in the holster: 1.e.e. Ensure the hammer is forward. Bend the elbow to approximately an upward 45-degree angle so the pistol is positioned near shoulder level.2 3. Ensure the slide is forward and the trigger finger is straight along the receiver. Lift the flap of the holster with the nonfiring hand (if using a holster with a flap). probable).4. c. Ensure the magazine is removed.2. The elbows can be bent during the alert carry. Note Prior to holstering the M11. With the firing hand firmly gripping the pistol grip.

Do not attempt to draw fast when first learning this technique. and begin the trigger squeeze within 1 second.NTRP 3-07. line up the sights. Keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction and keep the trigger finger straight along the receiver. in or around a vehicle) and for additional control when moving. which is time consuming.2. Grasp the pistol grip firmly with two hands. If practiced repeatedly. 4. The procedures for drawing. Remove finger from trigger. Hammer is forward and covered by thumb. Concentrate on a smooth. the user should be able to return the pistol without looking at holster. Four drawing technique stages are outlined in Figure 3-10. 3-17 AUG 2003 . Extend the arms and raise the pistol to just below eye level so a clear field of view is maintained. 3.4. 3. Speed will naturally follow. To maintain situational awareness. HOLSTERING. Avoid wasted motion. 3. 3. Keep the trigger finger straight along the receiver.2 Holstering A pistol should be drawn quickly and returned slowly. Drawing techniques are listed as follows: 1. 2. 2.1 Drawing In order to engage a target quickly from the holster. To perform the ready carry: 1. the following drawing technique will allow the shooter to acquire the target. 3. indoors. Technique is taught in stages for clarity.5. Just prior to holstering. 2. remove the slack from the trigger. Cover hammer with thumb. Proper technique must first be learned. b.2 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when there is no target but contact with the enemy is imminent.5 DRAWING. holstering. The consistent use of correct holstering techniques will ensure the return of the pistol to a safe carry. safe-flowing motion. review the following procedures to ensure the pistol is in safe configuration: a.2 Note Bending the elbows is advantageous in close-quarter environments (e. Ensure the hammer is forward. 3.. around cover. 3. and reloading the M11 follow.2.2.5.g. Engage decocking lever. Finger is outside of trigger guard and straight along the receiver. AND RELOADING THE M11 SERVICE PISTOL Specific instruction in drawing and reloading the M11 pistol will ensure quick and sustainable engagement of a target. 1. the shooter must find the shortest and quickest method of getting the firearm from the holster to the target.

e. Move the nonfiring hand toward the firing side. reach over to holster with the nonfiring hand and lift flap. The user should maintain 25 percent of vision on the weapon and 75 percent on the target. 3. 2. Note If utilizing a flapped holster. Keep index finger on round portion. Thrust the weapon forward toward target. Change eye focus from target to front sight. LOOK AND SQUEEZE 1. Keep knife edge of hand away from the body.2 DRAW GRAB TECHNIQUE 1. Keep trigger finger out of trigger guard. DRAW 1. Ensure nonfiring hand is not muzzled during this step. If holster does not have a flap. Remove the trigger finger to the outside of trigger guard and place it straight along the receiver.2. 3. Use the firing hand to holster while keeping flap secured against the body with the nonfiring hand. Take up slack. Bend the firing arm to facilitate reloading. Begin trigger squeeze. use the nonfiring hand to hold flap of holster against the side of the body. If utilizing a holster with a flap. Eye focus is center of mass on target. 2. SMACK 1. c. 4. No time for adjustments after the pistol is drawn. 2. 2. 3. safe-flowing motion improves the speed of unloading/reloading. Depress the magazine catch. palm down. 2.3 Unload/Reload The objective in a tactical situation is to quickly unload/reload and reengage the target. Both hands come together (SMACK). The holstered grip is grip to shoot with. a.NTRP 3-07. the nonfiring hand is free. attaining a proper grip. 1. Lift pistol up until muzzle cleanly clears holster. Rotate muzzle toward target by dropping firing side elbow until muzzle is downrange toward target. Keep thumb on flat portion. in front of firing hip. The firing hand grips pistol while it is in holster. M11 Service Pistol Drawing Technique Stages 5. 3. Figure 3-10. A smooth. on target. place finger on trigger. Use of the following procedure will ensure a smooth and safe unload/reload technique. b. As front sight approaches center of mass. d.5. 6. 3. Reach for a new magazine with the nonfiring hand. AUG 2003 3-18 .

5. Extend nonfiring index finger and place along round portion of magazine and projectile.7 M11 SERVICE PISTOL DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly. Release slide stop as weapon is coming up on target. assembly. b. 7. Align and place magazine into magazine well. refer to MCRP 301B. and function check of the M11 service pistol. c.2 3. Insert magazine into magazine well. M11 Service Pistol Reload 3-19 AUG 2003 . obtain new magazine. Reestablish two-handed grip. which allows a quick reload in darkness or by feel in low light situations. Figure 3-11. 6. SPEED FAST SLOW FAST PROCEDURE Release old magazine. TM 9-1005-325-10. 3. a.8 M11 SERVICE PISTOL SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on pistol marksmanship.2. Fully seat magazine. Allow empty magazine to fall to the deck. 3. b. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operators Manual. Shift 100 percent of vision to front sight. and trigger squeeze come together at one time. Ensure magazine is fully seated.NTRP 3-07. a. Ensure object sight alignment. Use the FAST/SLOW/FAST reload concept (see Figure 3-11) in a tactical situation. Feel for rounded portion of front of grip with tip of finger. sight picture. 3. Rotate weapon slightly toward nonfiring side to see into the magazine well.6 M11 SERVICE PISTOL ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures dictate that only a Condition 4 M11 (with slide locked to the rear) is issued from and returned to the armory. 4. c.

2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 3-20 .NTRP 3-07.2.

and remedial actions.1. major components. shoulder-fired weapon.2 CHAPTER 4 Mossberg 500 Shotgun 4. cycle of operation.2.S.NTRP 3-07. Navy forces. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Left Side 4-1 AUG 2003 .1 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the Mossberg 500 shotgun and information necessary to understand the Mossberg’s technical characteristics.1 Description of the Mossberg 500 Shotgun The Mossberg 500 shotgun (see Figures 4-1 and 4-2) is the basic shotgun for U.2 Mossberg 500 Shotgun Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the Mossberg 500 shotgun are listed in Figure 4-3. tubular-magazine-fed. 4. It is a 12-gauge. It has a thumb slide safety mounted on the top rear of the receiver. manually operated. repeating. and up to 100 yards (91 m) with a slug load. It is typically used at ranges of up to 50 yards (46 m) with a shot load. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. The Mossberg 500 has a 5-round magazine capacity and is both an offensive and defensive weapon. 4. pump-action. Front Sight Barrel Receiver Safety Magazine Cap Magazine Tube Trigger Sling Swivel Figure 4-1.1.

2.1. AUG 2003 4-2 . 4. Stock group (Figure 4-4) 2. Barrel group (Figure 4-6) 4.2 Receiver Group The receiver group houses the cartridge ejector and serves as support for all major groups and assemblies of the weapon.1.3.4 Trigger Group The trigger group houses the components required to fire the shotgun.3.2 Ejection Port Stock Action Lock Lever Loading Port Fore-end Sling Swivel Figure 4-2.3 Mossberg 500 Shotgun Major Components The Mossberg 500 shotgun has four major component groups: 1. Receiver group (Figure 4-5) 3.3 Barrel Group The barrel group houses cartridges for firing. 4.1.NTRP 3-07.1.1 Stock Group The stock group is an extension of the receiver group and provides a support to shoulder-fire the shotgun. The front sight serves as an aiming device. Trigger group (Figure 4-7). 4. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Right Side 4.1.3.3. 4.

52 mm) Pump slide action Tube 5 + 1 rounds 6.590 fps (485 mps) #00 Buck — 150 ft (46 m) Slug — 300 ft (91 m) #00 Buck — 1.13 kg) 37.NTRP 3-07.000 rounds N/A SW370-BB-OPI-010 Technical manual # Operator manual # SAFETIES Read the specifications on the shotgun barrel to ensure round length matches chamber size.5 in (953 mm) 17 or 20 in (432 or 508 mm) #00 Buck — 1. Logistics.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Caliber Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (Empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range MIL-S 500 1005-01-371-4462 Mossberg 12 gauge (18. Figure 4-3.079 m) Safety button Life expectancy 12 gauge 12 gauge 12 gauge AMMUNITION 2-3/4 inch shot shells 2-3/4 inch buckshot 2-3/4 inch slug LOGISTICS 10.980 ft (604 m) Slug — 3.2.9 lb (3. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Stock Group 4-3 AUG 2003 . Ammunition.540 ft (1. Figure 4-4. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Specifications. Wood or synthetic.375 fps (419 mps) Slug — 1. and Safeties STOCK GROUP PART Buttplate Stock CHARACTERISTICS May be recoil pad or hard plastic.

Allows action to be moved to the rear.2 RECEIVER GROUP PART Safety Trigger Bolt Loading Port Ejection Port Trigger Guard Bolt Lock Action Lock Lever Locks weapon. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Receiver Group BARREL GROUP PART Barrel Type Length Front Sight Muzzle Magazine Cap Smoothbore. Contains firing pin and extractor. Fixed bead. Cylinder bore or “open choke. Area in which shells are inserted. Below the barrel. Used to open and close bolt assembly. 17 or 20 in. used in conjunction with front sight bead when aiming. Protects trigger. CHARACTERISTICS Figure 4-5. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Barrel Group AUG 2003 4-4 . permitting loading and firing of weapon and ejection of spent cartridge. Alignment Grooves Fore-end Magazine Tube On top rear of receiver. the top front end of the bolt lock is cammed up.NTRP 3-07. Located rear of the trigger guard on right side.2. Initiates firing sequence. When the bolt is moved forward.” Holds barrel in receiver. locking into the barrel extension. Area from which spent casings are ejected. CHARACTERISTICS Figure 4-6.

4. Personnel shall perform the following steps to identify a stoppage: 1. Note Seek cover before performing remedial action procedures in a tactical environment (if the situation permits). Releases the hammer. 4. Disengages sear from hammer. and returning the shotgun to operation.2 Common Stoppages/Corrective Actions The most common stoppages to the Mossberg 500 and the actions used to clear them are described below.5. Figure 4-7. There is no single set of procedures that can clear all (or even most) of the stoppages that can occur with the Mossberg 500 shotgun. 3.5. Drives hammer.5 Introduction to Remedial Action An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage.2.1.1.4 Cycle of Operation for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the Mossberg 500 are listed in Figure 4-8.1 Identifying Stoppages Remedial action requires investigating the cause of the stoppage. perform the following steps to return the shotgun to action.2 TRIGGER GROUP PART Trigger Disconnector Sear Hammer Mainspring CHARACTERISTICS Moves disconnector forward.1. Remove the shotgun from the shoulder. 4. 4. Rotates and strikes firing pin. 2. 4-5 AUG 2003 . any stoppage must be investigated and remedial action must be performed to clear the stoppage.NTRP 3-07.1.1. Observe the ejection port and chamber. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Trigger Group 4. Pull the fore-end to the rear. The steps to clear the shotgun and return the weapon to action are selected based on the indicators described in the following section.2.5. clearing the stoppage. Therefore.1 New Round on Elevator If a new round is on the elevator.

Observe for the extraction of a round.3 Failure to Extract A failure to extract occurs when an empty round case remains in the chamber. Aim the weapon in a safe direction and attempt to fire. At the same time. The fired casing is extracted from the chamber by pulling the fore-end rearward. 4. With the thumb of the firing hand.1.2. 2. remove the round from the elevator. When the bolt is moved forward. locking into barrel extension. Depress the action lock lever and pull the fore-end to the rear. The cycle begins by pulling the trigger. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Cycle of Operation 1. 2. 5. When the fore-end is pushed forward. the top front end of bolt lock is cammed up. The following double-feed clearing method is recommended.2. With the fore-end to the rear. it resets the hammer assembly. the round is stripped from the elevator and chambered. 4.4 Double Feed A double feed is most often caused when the shooter fails to pull the action completely to the rear (called short stroking) or when a damaged shell latch exists.2. pry the case out of the chamber using any suitable instrument at hand. Using force. If step 5 does not extract an empty round case. If a round is not extracted. Observe for extraction of a round. perform the following steps: 1.NTRP 3-07.2 STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION A round is pushed onto the elevator by the magazine follower. remove the round from the elevator and push the fore-end fully forward.1. push the fore-end fully forward. Push the fore-end fully forward to chamber the round. pull the fore-end to the rear. As the bolt moves to the rear.2. push in on the front edge of the extractor and maintain pressure. Near the end of the rearward stroke.2 Weapon Out of Ammunition If a new round is not on the elevator. As the fore-end is pulled back. 4. 3. the bolt moves rearward until the bolt slide stops at the back of receiver.1. the casing is pivoted out through the ejection port.5. 6. 4. the weapon has run dry and must be reloaded. AUG 2003 4-6 . To clear a failure to extract. The method used to clear a double feed will depend on the severity of the stoppage.5.5. Figure 4-8.

2. Attempt to pull the fore-end back and push it forward to chamber a round. Place the shotgun on safe. Grasp the shotgun with the nonfiring hand on the fore-end and the firing hand on the small of the stock. Raise the nonfiring hand for assistance from range personnel.2 1. 2.1. When not sure why a stoppage has occurred. d. the ejection port and chamber must be observed to investigate the cause of the stoppage and determine the proper procedure required to return the weapon to action. This is sometimes accompanied by excessive smoke escaping from the chamber area.5 Fore-end Fails to Pull to the Rear If the fore-end cannot be pulled to the rear after attempting to fire or after depressing the action lock lever. It is normally identifiable by lower report and a reduced recoil.2. Point the shotgun downrange. out of the trigger guard. 4. 1. The topmost round in the breech may have to be pried out (using any suitable instrument at hand) before the bottom round can be chambered. Shotgun may discharge when struck on hard surface.5. Depress the action lock lever and. the ground) while pulling the fore-end to the rear. If an audible pop/reduced recoil is experienced during firing.NTRP 3-07. Place the trigger finger on the action lock lever. b.g.5. c. perform the following steps: 1. 4-7 AUG 2003 .2. Note Once the fore-end is pulled to the rear. 2. personnel should err on the side of safety. Check for a bore obstruction only after waiting a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure a hangfire did not occur. immediately cease fire and perform the following steps: a. Training environment.6 Audible Pop/Reduced Recoil An audible pop occurs when only a portion of the propellant is ignited. with the muzzle pointed up in a safe direction. 4.. The range personnel will take control of the weapon and check for a bore obstruction. Push the bottom round into the magazine tube so the elevator can be depressed. strike the stock of the shotgun on a hard surface (e.1.

Cradle the weapon with the firing hand forward of the receiver. check the weapon for dirt. Combat environment.2 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the safety features. 4. perform the following steps: a.3. the weapon will be removed from the firing line. and grease.2. will maximize safety during weapons handling and promote the effective employment of this shotgun. boxed. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the shotgun from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2.NTRP 3-07. Rotate the weapon inward until the magazine tube is visible. if necessary. To clear the shotgun. Place the shotgun in Condition 4 (see Figure 4-9). Naval Surface Warfare Center. The standardized procedures included in this chapter. AUG 2003 4-8 . 4. and shipped to Crane Division. Tuck the stock of the shotgun under the firing arm against the rib cage. Pull the fore-end to the rear. when consistently and properly used. 4.2 e. tagged. With the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. Note Maintain muzzle awareness and control of the weapon at all times. Note Before loading the Mossberg 500.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor to direct the loading.2. 2. 4. Weapon condition codes specific to the Mossberg 500 are defined in Figure 4-9.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. ensure the weapon is in Condition 4. unloading. when consistently applied. will result in safe and proficient handling of the Mossberg 500. 4. b. and employment of any weapon. The tactical situation may dictate that correction of an audible pop/reduced recoil is necessary. Inspect the bore for an obstruction from the chamber end.3 Safe Handling Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun on the Range The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 4-10 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. operation. 3. and conditions of readiness specific to the Mossberg 500. excess oil. d.2. If there is a bore obstruction.2.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun The Mossberg 500 safety status is defined by four weapon condition codes. The commands set forth in Figure 4-10.2. c. 2. Insert a cleaning rod or other field expedient into the bore and clear the obstruction from the chamber end.

action closed. With the thumb of the nonfiring hand. Stop target engagement. Take a weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. chamber empty.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. chamber empty. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Weapon Condition Codes COMMAND Load Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. Condition 2 pertains to weapons with external hammers only. 4-9 AUG 2003 . Remove a round from the ammunition pouch with the nonfiring hand. With the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. weapon on safe. An audible click should be heard when the round is fully inserted. action closed. 5. Figure 4-10. 7.2. depress the action lock lever with the trigger finger and pull the fore-end firmly and quickly all the way to the rear. This prevents the round from sliding back out of the magazine tube. Press the round down into the receiver through the loading port with the thumb of the nonfiring hand until the crimped end of the round rests against the magazine tube follower. push the round into the magazine tube until the brass rim of the round base snaps into place past the cartridge stop.2. Specifies when personnel may engage targets. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. Magazine tube filled.3. weapon on safe. Not applicable for the service shotgun.2 CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Magazine tube filled. Magazine tube empty.NTRP 3-07. weapon on safe. 4. 6. Figure 4-9. Mossberg 500 Shotgun Weapon Handling Commands 4. action closed. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. Requires a second person to check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the shotgun is put into Condition 4. After the first round has been loaded. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the shotgun from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1. round in chamber. repeat steps 4 through 6 until the desired number of rounds has been loaded into the magazine tube.

Take the shotgun off safe and squeeze the trigger. With the forefinger of the nonfiring hand or the thumb of the firing hand. With the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. Place the trigger finger straight along the receiver. ensure the shotgun is on safe. SHOW CLEAR.3. release the action lock lever and cover the ejection port with the palm of the firing hand. Aim the shotgun.3 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE.2 2. 4.5 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD.2.3.2.6 Procedures to UNLOAD. As soon as the fore-end moves slightly rearward. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. 4. AUG 2003 4-10 . Ensure the shotgun is on safe. Rotate the shotgun to the upright position. The process of pulling the fore-end to the rear and pushing the fore-end forward is referred to as cycling the action. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. 7. Push the fore-end fully forward and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. This action chambers the round. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. 2. 3. Push the fore-end fully forward. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD.NTRP 3-07. Push the fore-end fully forward to chamber a new round. Repeat step 3 until the magazine tube is empty. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. 8.2.2. Place the stock of the shotgun on the firing-side hip or under the firing-side arm. ensure the shotgun is on safe. 6. 3. Remove the round from the magazine tube and place it in an ammunition pouch. Rotate the shotgun until the magazine tube is facing upward and the shotgun stock is under the firing-side arm. 4. 5. Depress the action lock lever with the trigger finger of the firing hand and slowly pull the fore-end to the rear with the nonfiring hand.4 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. depress the cartridge stop and release a round from the magazine tube with either hand. Rotate the shotgun until the magazine tube is facing upward and the shotgun stock is under the firing arm.3. 2. Visually inspect the magazine and chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. 4. 2. With the muzzle pointed in a safe direction.3. Remove the round from the ejection port with the firing hand. Place the shotgun on safe with the thumb of the firing hand. 2.2. 4. Pull the fore-end quickly to the rear to eject the empty round case.

2. 10. Personnel line up at the clearing barrel and. Remove the round from the magazine tube and place it in an ammunition pouch.3 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN AT THE CLEARING BARREL The sole purpose of a clearing barrel is to provide a safe direction in which to point a weapon when performing any or all of the following functions: load and make ready. Rotate the shotgun until the magazine tube is facing upward. 7. 4. The clearing barrel supervisor will read each command slowly and clearly. keep the weapon pointed in the clearing barrel.NTRP 3-07. or unload. Repeat step 3 until the magazine tube is empty. 8. Rotate the shotgun to the upright position. 6.3.2. 9. release the action lock lever and cover the ejection port with the palm of the firing hand. Place the stock of the shotgun on the firing-side hip or under the firing-side arm. and perform the following steps to take the shotgun from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 4-11 AUG 2003 . Clear unnecessary personnel away from clearing barrel. 5. depress the cartridge stop and release a round from the magazine tube. show clear. follow the directions described below. Acknowledge that the ejection port and chamber area are clear. b. 4. Have a designated supervisor inspect the shotgun to ensure no ammunition is present in the chamber area. Have a supervisor again inspect the shotgun to ensure no ammunition is present in the magazine tube. Inspect general condition of clearing barrel. The following procedures should always be followed prior to using a clearing barrel: 1. b. 11. With the forefinger of the firing hand or the thumb of the nonfiring hand. Visually inspect the magazine and chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. written clearing barrel procedures shall be posted near the clearing barrel. Remove the round from the ejection port with the firing hand. As soon as the fore-end moves slightly rearward. 3. Push the forearm fully forward and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. Inspect behind/adjacent to clearing barrel. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. Depress the action lock lever with the forefinger of the firing hand and slowly pull the foreend to the rear with the nonfiring hand. 4. The supervisor shall: a.1 LOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun On the supervisor’s command LOAD. c.2 3. At every duty station. one at a time. Ensure the weapon is on safe. Visually inspect the ejection port and chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. while closely monitoring the process. unload. Ensure no ammunition remains in the magazine tube. Acknowledge that the magazine tube is clear. The supervisor shall: a.

3. Push the fore-end forward and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. Ensure the shotgun is on safe. To transfer the shotgun using the show clear method. 4. 4. 2. Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4. 4.4. Pull the fore-end to the rear.3. 4. Push the round into the magazine tube. when consistently applied.NTRP 3-07. Allow for a secondary inspection of the magazine tube and chamber. 4. 3.1 Show Clear Transfer A show clear transfer is usually conducted at guard mount when weapons are issued. keep the weapon pointed in the clearing barrel.4 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific instructions that. the following procedures shall be observed. and movement with the weapon. transfer of the weapon between personnel. SHOW CLEAR. 5.2. 6. Remove the rounds from the magazine tube. Visually inspect the magazine and chamber to ensure they are empty. 3. Push the fore-end forward and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. and perform the following steps to take the shotgun from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1.2 1. and perform the following steps to take the shotgun from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Pull the fore-end to the rear and catch the ejected round.3. will promote the safe handling of the Mossberg 500. Remove the rounds from the magazine tube. 2. Ensure the shotgun is on safe. Repeat until all rounds are loaded. Visually inspect the magazine and chamber to ensure they are empty. personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. 2. 5.3 UNLOAD. Rotate the shotgun so the magazine tube is facing upward. SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. AUG 2003 4-12 . personnel will place their trigger finger straight along the receiver. 4. 4. keep the weapon pointed in the clearing barrel.2 UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD.

Push the fore-end fully forward.4. 4.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the Mossberg 500 Shotgun Specific instruction governing the movement of the Mossberg 500 will ensure that personnel move safely with the weapon while concurrently staying prepared to engage a threat. Transports are also used whenever both hands are needed for other work. 4-13 AUG 2003 . to the person receiving the weapon.2 4. Cross body sling arms (muzzle up/down).2 Weak Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Down) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely. Ensure the shotgun is in Condition 4.2.1 Mossberg 500 Shotgun Transports Transports are used when no immediate threat is present and are especially useful when moving for long periods.1. Visually inspect the magazine and chamber to ensure there is no ammunition present.1 Strong Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Up) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely.1. 3. Leave the fore-end to the rear and hand the shotgun. Strong side sling arms (muzzle up) 2.2. 3. 2. Weak side sling arms (muzzle down) 3. Visually inspect the magazine and chamber to ensure there is no ammunition present. Pull the fore-end to the rear. Ensure the shotgun is on safe. 4.4. with the muzzle pointed in a safe direction. The weapon is slung over the strong shoulder with the muzzle pointed in an upward direction. Observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber.2.4.1.1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon Personnel transferring the weapon shall: 1. The procedures for transporting and carrying the Mossberg 500 follow.4.4. 4. The weapon is slung over the weak shoulder with the muzzle pointed in a downward direction. There are three transports for the Mossberg 500 shotgun: 1. 4. This transport is used primarily during periods of inclement weather in order to keep moisture out of the bore of the weapon.2.NTRP 3-07. 4. 2.1.2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon Personnel receiving the weapon shall: 1.4. Ensure that bolt is all the way to the rear. 4.

and the trigger finger straight along the receiver.2 Mossberg 500 Shotgun Carries When carrying the shotgun. Place the stock of the weapon in the firing shoulder with the muzzle angled down at approximately 45 degrees and pointed in the direction of the threat. 2. 1. the firing hand around the small of the stock. Tactical carry 2. Angle the muzzle of the weapon upward at approximately 45 degrees and pointed in the general direction of the threat. 4.4.2 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when contact is likely. the shooting hand is placed firmly around the small of the stock. Place the nonfiring hand on the fore-end. slightly below eye level.NTRP 3-07. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver.2. 4. Place the stock of the shotgun along the firing side of the body at approximately hip-level.3 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when contact is imminent. There are three weapon carries for the Mossberg 500 shotgun: 1. Place the nonfiring hand on the fore-end.3 Procedures to Present the Mossberg 500 Shotgun The procedures that follow provide two methods to efficiently take the Mossberg 500 from a transport to a firing stance. 4.4. Place the nonfiring hand on the fore-end. AUG 2003 4-14 .4. 2.1 Tactical Carry The tactical carry is used when there is no immediate threat. 2. Place the stock of the weapon in the firing shoulder with the muzzle pointed in the direction of the threat and the shotgun sights just below eye level. 3. Unless the situation dictates otherwise. the weapon is normally slung with the muzzle down in order to prevent pointing the muzzle in an unsafe direction.1.2.2.2. Alert carry 3.2. 1.2. 4.3 Cross Body Sling Arms (Muzzle Up/Down) This transport may be used when both hands are required for work. the firing hand around the small of the stock. 1. Ready carry.2 4.2.4. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 4.2. The weapon is slung across the back with the muzzle in an upward or downward direction.4. the firing hand around the small of the stock. 4.2. Position the muzzle in front of the eyes.4.

4. visually locate the target. At the same time. which will assist in attaining proper stock to cheek weld. Reach under the strong arm with the nonfiring hand between the sling and the body and grasp the fore-end. While looking at the target.2 4. When the strong arm is free of the sling and the shotgun clears all personal gear. Take the shotgun off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. While looking at the target.2. visually locate the target. Continue pulling the shotgun forward with the nonfiring hand while rotating the shotgun parallel to the deck.3. 7. 8. which will assist in attaining proper stock-to-cheek weld. 7. Shotguns tend to have a slightly higher impact point on the target due to the length of the barrel and recoil. Depress the action lock lever with the firing hand and pull the fore-end to the rear and push forward with the nonfiring hand to chamber a round. Shift the focus back to the front sight bead to obtain sight alignment. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of shotgun from the shoulder. Center the front sight bead on the alignment grooves of the receiver. Attain sight picture by placing the front sight bead just below the target center of mass. 5. 2. 9. Level the shotgun while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder. Continue extending the shotgun toward the target to ensure the shotgun clears all personal gear. Grasp the sling with the firing hand to prevent the shotgun from falling off the shoulder. Center the front sight bead on the alignment grooves of the receiver.4. 4. Rotate the shotgun counterclockwise while extending the muzzle toward the target (clockwise for left-handed shooters). Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver. and push forward with the nonfiring hand to chamber a round. Roll the strong shoulder forward and release the sling from the firing hand once the fore-end has cleared the elbow.NTRP 3-07.1 Presenting From Strong Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Up) 1. pull the fore-end to the rear. Depress the action lock lever with the firing hand. Attain the sight picture by placing the front sight bead just below the target center of mass. As the sights become level with the aiming eye. At the same time. 5. Shift the focus back to the front sight bead to obtain sight alignment. 4-15 AUG 2003 .2 Presenting From Weak Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Down) 1. Level the shotgun while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder. Grasp fore-end with the nonfiring hand (the index finger points toward the muzzle). 6. pull shotgun forward off the shoulder with the nonfiring hand. 3. 4. Take the shotgun off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver.4. establish the firing position. Establish firing position. 6. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of the shotgun from the shoulder. 2. As the sights become level with the aiming eye. Shotguns tend to have a slightly higher impact point on the target due to the length of the barrel and recoil. 3. pull down on the sling and raise the strong elbow out and parallel to the deck.3.

fore-end to the rear. described in more detail in MCRP 301B and MCRP 3-01A. if time permits. SWB370-BB-OPI-010. However.2. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operators Manual. Mossberg 500 is issued from and returned to the armory. 4. AUG 2003 4-16 .7 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS The shotgun is primarily a point-and-shoot weapon designed to fire buckshot or field loads.2 4.4. Breath control and trigger control should be taught the same as with the pistol and rifle. procedures should be conducted as specified above under paragraph 4.NTRP 3-07. 4.6 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the Mossberg 500 shotgun.3.5 MOSSBERG 500 SHOTGUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4. it is recommended that when aiming the weapon.

It has a maximum range of 3. It has a magazine capacity of 20 rounds.2.1. gas-operated. air-cooled. and remedial actions.725 meters and a maximum effective range of between 460 and 700 meters (depending on use of bipod and rate of fire in automatic or semiautomatic mode). is a lightweight.1 Description of the M14 Rifle The M14. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling.2 CHAPTER 5 M14 Rifle 5. magazine-fed. Front Sight Elevation Knob Stock Spindle Valve Sling Swivel Bolt Catch Magazine Latch Trigger Figure 5-1.1 M14 RIFLE DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M14 rifle and information necessary to understand the M14’s technical characteristics. M14 Rifle Left Side 5-1 AUG 2003 .NTRP 3-07. major components. shown in Figures 5-1 and 5-2. shoulder-fired weapon designed primarily for semiautomatic fire. 5. cycle of operation. It has an automatic rate of fire of 100 to 150 rounds per minute and a semiautomatic rate of fire of 40 rounds per minute.

1 Trigger Group The trigger group houses the components required to fire the rifle.3.NTRP 3-07. Stock group (Figure 5-5) 3.1.3.3 Barrel and Receiver Groups The barrel and receiver group assembly serves as a support for all major components and controls the action of the rifle through the major components. M14 Rifle Right Side 5.1.1. Trigger housing group (Figure 5-4) 2. 5. 5.1. AUG 2003 5-2 .2 M14 Rifle Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M14 rifle are listed in Figure 5-3.2 Stock Group The stock group is an extension of the receiver assembly and provides a support to shoulder-fire the rifle.1. 5.3 M14 Rifle Major Components The M14 has three major component groups: 1.2 Windage Knob Rear Sight Operating Rod Handle Stock Safety Sling Swivel Magazine Flash Suppressor Figure 5-2.2.3. 5. Barrel and receiver group assembly (Figure 5-6).

5 Introduction to Remedial Action The M14 rifle is an effective and reliable weapon. It is important to understand.125 mm) 22 in (559 mm) 2.4 Cycle of Operation for the M14 Rifle It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation to ensure the M14 is readily available for action.13 lb (4. and Safeties 5. M14 Rifle Specifications.2.221 ft (3.509 to 2.000 rounds TM 9-1005-223-90 TM 9-1005-223-90 SAFETIES Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition Figure 5-3. however. Therefore. 5.3 in (1. Both malfunctions and stoppages are discussed in the next two sections.1.14 kg) 44.1. Logistics.297 ft (460 to 700 m) 12. 5-3 AUG 2003 . Ammunition. the appropriate remedial action will be based on the cause of the malfunction or stoppage.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type M14 1005-00-589-1271 Various Semiauto gas operated Ball (M80) AMMUNITION Match special ball (M118) Tracer (M62) Blank (M82) Dummy (M63 and M172) Grenade (M64) Match (M852) Match long range (AA11) Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (Empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range Caliber Double-stacked box 20 rounds 9. The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M14 are listed in Figure 5-7. Proper care and preventive maintenance will help ensure the rifle’s serviceability.NTRP 3-07. that there is no one set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur.725 m) 7.62 mm NATO Safety button In-service date Life expectancy Technical manual # Operator manual # LOGISTICS 1957 25.800 fps (853 mps) 1.

It may be helpful to remember the acronym SPORS.2.2 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage.5. Many stoppages can be prevented by properly caring for the M14.2 TRIGGER HOUSING GROUP PART Trigger and Sear Assembly Hammer Safety Trigger Guard Magazine Latch CHARACTERISTICS Moves disconnector forward and releases the hammer. M14 Rifle Trigger Housing Group STOCK GROUP PART Rifle Stock Buttstock Swivel Fore-end Swivel Buttplate Assembly Shoulder Rest Plate CHARACTERISTICS Support to shoulder-fire the rifle. it is important to clear any stoppage as quickly as possible.1. a malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation.1.3 Performing Remedial Action To perform remedial action.5. use the procedures described in Figure 5-8. 5. Figure 5-4.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the rifle to fire satisfactorily or to perform as designed. When a malfunction occurs.NTRP 3-07.1. Remedial actions to ensure weapon firing integrity follow. AUG 2003 5-4 . press forward to release. Protects trigger. Aft attachment point for rifle sling. Rotates and strikes firing pin. Forward attachment point for the rifle sling.5. Figure 5-5.1. Holds magazine in rifle.4 Common Stoppages/Corrective Actions The steps taken to clear the M14 are based on observation of the following three visual and one audible indicators. Support when firing from prone position. Stoppages are normally discovered when the rifle will not fire. M14 Rifle Stock Group 5. the rifle must be repaired by an armorer. 5. Prevents rifle from firing.5. Proper care includes keeping the weapon clean and well-lubricated. However. 5. Protects stock. provides firing control. To keep the M14 in action.

2.5. Gas Cylinder Plug Gas Cylinder Spindle Valve Secures gas cylinder lock. Vertical for normal firing. CHARACTERISTICS Figure 5-6. Bolt Catch 1.2 Bolt Is Locked to the Rear To return the weapon to operation. M14 Rifle Barrel and Receiver Group Assembly 5. Located on left side. Locks the bolt to the rear. then release it to allow the bolt to move forward and chamber a round. 1. Located on the left side. Sight in and attempt to fire. forward to fire. Located on the right side. Insert a filled magazine into the magazine well and tug downward on the magazine to ensure it is properly seated. 4. Safety Flash Suppressor Press to rear for safe. 1. Press the magazine release paddle. conduct a dry reload: 1. Front Sight 1.1. Pull the operating rod handle to the rear. Mounted on top of flash suppressor. and stow it on person if time permits. Fixed blade type sight with guards.2 BARREL AND RECEIVER GROUP ASSEMBLY PART Bolt Assembly Operating Rod and Connector Group Selector Windage Knob Houses firing pin and extractor. 2. 5-5 AUG 2003 . 5.1.5. Helps reduce climb and recoil by venting gas to all sides of muzzle.2.1 Bolt Is Forward To return the weapon to operation. Adjusts elevation of aperture. Reduces muzzle flash. Graduated in meters. follow the procedures defined in Figure 5-8. 3. Houses gas piston.NTRP 3-07. 1. Transmits power from gas cylinder to operating parts. remove the empty magazine. 2. 2. 2. Adjusts lateral movement of rear sights. Horizontal for use with grenade launcher or line throwing kit as it cuts off the flow of gas to gas cylinder to utilize maximum force of expanding gas for propulsion. 3. Elevation Knob 1. Selects firing mode. 2. 2.4.4.

Observe ejection of case or cartridge. b.1. A double feed occurs when two rounds are stuck in the receiver. Engagement of the locking lugs on the bolt with the locking recesses in the receiver.3 Brass Is Obstructing the Chamber Area Brass obstructing the chamber area usually indicates a double feed or a failure to eject. Attempt to remove the magazine.2 STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Stripping of a round from the magazine by the bolt. Release the operating rod handle to feed new round. M14 Rifle Cycle of Operation REMEDIAL ACTION PROCEDURES — SPORS Phase One S P O Phase Two R S Slap upward on magazine to ensure it is seated. Perform remedial action if chamber is obstructed. If weapon does not fire. Attempt to lock the bolt to the rear. Rotate the rifle so the top of the chamber is facing down. Figure 5-7.2. Hold the operating rod handle to the rear and shake the rifle to free the round(s). AUG 2003 5-6 . M14 Rifle Stoppage Remedial Action Procedures 5. Sight in and attempt to fire. 4. To return the weapon to operation: 1. perform remedial action. hold the operating rod handle to the rear to manually clear the round(s). Pushing of the round into the chamber by the bolt. 5. If the bolt will not lock to the rear: a.4. Conduct a dry reload. Shoot. forcing the projectile out of the barrel. 3. Figure 5-8. c. Pull operating rod handle to the rear. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. Attempt to fire weapon. Do not ride operating rod handle forward. Expulsion of the cartridge case by the ejector and spring. Resetting of the hammer. Visually inspect chamber area for obstruction.5. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor claw. 2. Disengagement of the locking lugs on the bolt from the locking recesses in the receiver. If the round(s) do not shake free.NTRP 3-07.

Point the rifle downrange. the weapon will be removed from the firing line.4 Audible Pop/Reduced Recoil An audible pop occurs when only a portion of the propellant is ignited. Training environment. If there is a bore obstruction. d.NTRP 3-07. b. and shipped to Crane Division. tagged. 5.5. f.2 M14 RIFLE SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of readiness. 1. When not sure why a stoppage has occurred. b. Naval Surface Warfare Center.1. c. To clear the rifle. and safety features specific to the M14 rifle. Weapon condition codes specific to the M14 are defined in Figure 5-9. Inspect the bore for an obstruction from the muzzle end. If an audible pop/reduced recoil is experienced during firing. personnel should err on the side of safety. c. will maximize safety during weapons handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon. Raise the nonfiring hand for assistance from range personnel. Insert a cleaning rod into the bore and clear the obstruction. Lock the bolt to the rear. Combat environment.2. 2.2 5. The tactical situation may dictate that correction of an audible pop/reduced recoil is necessary. perform the following steps: a. when consistently applied.2. check for a bore obstruction only after waiting a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure a hangfire did not occur.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M14 Rifle The M14’s safety status is defined by four weapon condition codes. Sight in and attempt to fire. e. The range personnel will take control of the weapon and check for a bore obstruction. boxed. d. e. The standardized procedures included in this section.4. 5-7 AUG 2003 . immediately cease fire and perform the following steps: a. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2. operation. It is normally identifiable by reduced recoil and a lower report. This is sometimes accompanied by excessive smoke escaping from the chamber area. Place the rifle on safe. Conduct a dry reload. 5. Place the rifle in Condition 4 (see Figure 5-9).

chamber empty. While pointing the muzzle of the rifle in a safe direction. magazine inserted. magazine inserted. magazine removed. and employment of any weapon.2. M14 Rifle Weapon Condition Codes 5. cause a stoppage. bolt forward. bolt forward. AUG 2003 5-8 .1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. 5. Safety on. Ensure the safety is in the safe position.3. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M14.3 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M14 Rifle on the Range The weapons handling commands defined in Figure 5-10 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds. which can. round in chamber.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M14 Rifle Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading.2. Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects. when consistently and properly used. in turn. 5. 5. Figure 5-9. 3. Do not walk the bolt forward. Not applicable. releasing control of the magazine prior to proper seating can cause it to fall out of the magazine well. bolt forward. The commands set forth in Figure 5-10.2. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. Maintaining the muzzle in a safe direction. insert a magazine into the magazine well. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. unloading. release the bolt forward. check the weapon for dirt.2 CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Safety on. Ensure the bolt is fully forward. Note Before loading the M14. Lock the bolt to the rear. 4. Ensure the magazine is fully seated. chamber empty. excess oil. Safety on. Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe.2. and grease. 2. Attempt to place the safety in the safe position.NTRP 3-07.

Ensure the magazine is fully seated. releasing control of the magazine prior to proper seating can cause it to fall out of the magazine well. Ensure the safety is in the safe position. 2.3 Procedures to LOAD AND MAKE READY On the command LOAD AND MAKE READY. in turn. 3.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. 5-9 AUG 2003 . cause a stoppage. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. Do not walk the bolt forward. Attempt to place the safety in the safe position. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3.3. M14 Rifle Weapon Handling Commands 5. Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4.2. 5.2. 4. Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe. which can. Ensure safety lever is in safe position. 2. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. With a supervisor. Engage the target. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. insert a magazine into the magazine well. Lock the bolt to the rear.2 COMMAND Load Make Ready Load and Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds.2.3. While maintaining the muzzle in a safe direction.NTRP 3-07. release the bolt forward. Stop target engagement. Figure 5-10. 5. While pointing the muzzle of the rifle in a safe direction. While pointing the muzzle in a safe direction. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. pull the operating rod handle fully to the rear and release.

Aim the rifle.3. Ensure the chamber is empty and no ammunition is present.3. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Have another person inspect the rifle to ensure no ammunition is present. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. ensure the weapon is on safe. inspect.2. release the bolt and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. 3. 6. Place the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 2.2.2.NTRP 3-07. 5. 4. 3.3. After receiving acknowledgment that the rifle is clear.2. 4. ensure the weapon is on safe. 5.2 5. 2. 5. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe.2. 3.4 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE. 2. 6.6 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1.7 Procedures to UNLOAD. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. While pointing the muzzle in a safe direction. Take the rifle off safe. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. SHOW CLEAR. Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe.3. Lock the bolt to the rear. Lock the bolt to the rear. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine. Place the weapon on safe. Release the operating rod handle and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. While pointing the muzzle in a safe direction. Ensure the chamber is empty and no ammunition is present. AUG 2003 5-10 .5 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. 5. 2. 7. Recover. 5. Squeeze the trigger to engage the target.

Ensure the safety is in the safe position. UNLOAD or UNLOAD. 4.2 7.NTRP 3-07. Recover. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. written clearing barrel procedures shall be posted near the clearing barrel.3. Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine. Inspect general condition of clearing barrel. 5. inspect and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine. 2. 5. 4. inspect. 3. SHOW CLEAR. 2. The following procedures should always be followed prior to using a clearing barrel: 1.2 UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M14 Rifle On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. insert a magazine into the magazine well. Ensure the bolt is fully forward. Lock the bolt to the rear. 5.2. While pointing the muzzle of the rifle in a safe direction. Do not walk the bolt forward. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch. 8.1 LOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M14 Rifle On the supervisor’s command LOAD. Ensure the magazine is fully seated. Lock the bolt to the rear. Ensure the chamber is empty and no ammunition is present. Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe. 3. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. 7. Clear unnecessary personnel away from clearing barrel. 5-11 AUG 2003 .3 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M14 RIFLE AT THE CLEARING BARREL The sole purpose of a clearing barrel is to provide a safe direction in which to point a weapon when performing any or all of the following functions: LOAD. Recover. At every duty station. 5. with trigger finger straight along the receiver and with the rifle pointed in the clearing barrel. personnel will. Inspect behind/adjacent to clearing barrel.3. one at a time. release the bolt forward. Ensure the weapon is on safe. The clearing barrel supervisor will read each command slowly and clearly while closely monitoring the process. with trigger finger straight along the receiver and with the rifle pointed in the clearing barrel. Attempt to place the safety in the safe position. 3. 6. follow the directions described below. 2. Maintaining the muzzle in a safe direction. Personnel line up at the clearing barrel and. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. personnel will. Release the operating rod handle and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. 5.

6. Lock the bolt to the rear. 2. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine. 5. SHOW CLEAR. To properly pass a weapon between personnel.2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon Personnel receiving the weapon shall: 1. Remove the magazine if it is present. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. 2. perform the following procedures: 5. when consistently applied. 2. Recover. Have another person inspect the rifle to ensure no ammunition is present. 4.3. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch. AUG 2003 5-12 . Visually and physically verify that the rifle is clear and safe. 5. 5.4. 5. Ensure the weapon is on safe. Visually inspect the chamber to ensure there is no ammunition present.2. This everyday occurrence must take place with the same safety considerations expected on a live fire range.4. After receiving acknowledgment that the rifle is clear. 7. 3. 4. Visually inspect the chamber to ensure there is no ammunition present. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. Ensure the rifle is on safe. SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M14 Rifle On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. Lock the bolt to the rear.NTRP 3-07. with trigger finger straight along the receiver and with the rifle pointed in the clearing barrel. 5.2 5.1. Ensure the chamber is empty and no ammunition is present.3 UNLOAD. release the bolt and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. Leave the bolt locked to the rear and hand the weapon to the person receiving the weapon.1.4 M14 RIFLE SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific instructions that. personnel will. inspect. 8. 3.1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon Personnel handing off the weapon shall: 1. will promote the safe handling of the M14 between personnel and during movement with the weapon.1 Weapon Transfer From One Person to Another Proper weapon handling is required every time a person passes a weapon to another person or receives a weapon from another person. Ensure the rifle is on safe.4.

4.2.2.1. each is described below.NTRP 3-07. in which the rifle is slung over the back or shoulder. 5. The weapon is slung over the strong shoulder with the muzzle pointed up.3 Cross Body Sling Arms (Muzzle Up or Down) This transport may be used when both hands are required for work.4.2 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when enemy contact is likely (probable). 5.1 M14 Rifle Transports Transports. To perform this carry: 5-13 AUG 2003 . the alert. if necessary. All three carries permit quick engagement when necessary. the firing hand around the small of the stock. There are three carries for the M14: the tactical. Engagement of the enemy is faster from the alert than from the tactical carry. To perform this carry: 1.4.1 Strong Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Up) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely. 5. are used when no immediate threat is present and are especially useful when moving for long periods. Angle the barrel of the rifle upward about 45 degrees in the general direction of the enemy. The weapon is slung across the back with the muzzle up or down.2.1. staying prepared to engage a threat. It permits control of the rifle while moving and still allows quick engagement of the enemy.2 M14 Rifle Carries Weapon carries are designed to place personnel in a state of increased readiness as the threat level increases.2 Weak Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Down) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and contact with the enemy is unlikely.2 3. muzzle.1 Tactical Carry The tactical carry is used when no immediate threat is present.2.1. 2.2. Unless the situation dictates otherwise. 5. the weapon is slung with the muzzle down to prevent pointing the muzzle in an unsafe direction.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M14 Rifle Specific instructions governing movement of the M14 will ensure personnel move safely with the weapon while.2. 3. 5.4.4. concurrently. They are also used whenever both hands are needed for other work.2.4. 5. The weapon is slung over the weak shoulder with the muzzle pointed down. and the ready.2. The procedures for transporting and carrying the M14 follow. Place the nonfiring hand on the forward portion of the stock. Position the muzzle slightly below eye level. 5. Draw operating rod to the rear and release. Ensure wherever the eyes move. observing the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. There are three weapons transports. and trigger finger straight along the receiver.2.2.4. This transport is used primarily during periods of inclement weather to keep moisture out of the bore of the rifle. target). 5.4. the muzzle also moves (eyes.

pull it to its rearmost position. 7.2 1. and trigger finger straight along the receiver. Place the buttstock of the rifle in shoulder with the muzzle of the rifle pointed in the direction of enemy contact.4.2. Place the buttstock of the rifle in shoulder with the muzzle angled down about 45 degrees and pointed in the likely direction of the enemy. establish the firing position and grasp the operating rod handle with the firing hand. 2.1 Presenting From Strong Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Up) 1. 5. Level rifle while pulling it firmly into pocket of shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. Continue pulling rifle forward with the nonfiring hand while rotating rifle parallel to the deck. the firing hand around the small of the stock. shift the focus back to the front sight post to obtain sight alignment and place the tip of the post center mass on the target to obtain sight picture. At the same time. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of rifle from shoulder.4.2.3 Procedures to Present the M14 Rifle The procedures that follow provide two methods to efficiently take the M14 rifle from a transport to a firing stance: 5. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping trigger finger straight along the receiver. Roll the strong shoulder forward and release the sling from the firing hand once the forward portion of the stock has cleared the elbow. Rotate rifle counterclockwise while extending muzzle toward target (clockwise for left-handed shooters). and trigger finger straight along the receiver. pull down on the sling and raise strong elbow out and parallel to the deck. Lower the rifle sights to just below eye level so a clear field of view is maintained until a target has been identified. 4. 5.NTRP 3-07. pull rifle forward off the shoulder with the nonfiring hand. Grasp the sling with the firing hand to prevent rifle from falling off shoulder.4. visually locate target through the rear sight aperture.2. 2. As sights become level with the aiming eye. While looking at target. AUG 2003 5-14 . 4. Take rifle off safe and place trigger finger on trigger. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of rifle from shoulder. Do not move head down to meet stock of rifle.3. The ready allows immediate target engagement. and release. As rifle sights settle. Place the nonfiring hand on the forward portion of stock. 6. At the same time. 2.4. 3. 2. While looking at target. To perform this carry: 1. When the strong arm is free of the sling and rifle clears all personal gear. 5. Reach under strong arm with the nonfiring hand between the sling and the body and grasp the forward portion of stock. Grasp the forward portion of the stock with the nonfiring hand (the index finger points toward the muzzle). Place the nonfiring hand on the forward portion of stock. 3.3. 5.3 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when contact with the enemy is imminent.2 Presenting From Weak Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Down) 1. the firing hand around the small of the stock.

9. FM 23-8. 8. Grasp operating rod handle with the firing hand and pull it to its rearmost position and release. Take rifle off safe and place trigger finger on trigger. 5.NTRP 3-07. Continue extending rifle toward target to ensure rifle clears all personal gear. Establish firing position.2 5. shift the focus back to the front sight post to obtain sight alignment and place the tip of the post center mass on the target to obtain sight picture. TM 9-1005-223-90. 5. visually locate target through the rear sight aperture.5 M14 RIFLE ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M14 is issued from and returned to the armory. As sights become level with the aiming eye.2.6 M14 RIFLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly. Establish firing grip with the firing hand while keeping trigger finger straight along the receiver.7 M14 RIFLE SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on rifle marksmanship refer to Field Manual. As rifle sights settle. 6. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operators Manual. 7. 5-15 AUG 2003 . 5. Do not move head down to meet stock of rifle. and function check of the M14 rifle. Level rifle while pulling it firmly into pocket of shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. assembly.

NTRP 3-07.2.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 5-16 .

gas-operated. It has two available magazine capacities of 20 or 30 rounds and a cyclic rate of fire of 700 to 900 rounds per minute. 6. and remedial actions.1 Description of the M16A3 Rifle The M16A3 rifle. shown in Figures 6-1 and 6-2. major components. 6. is a lightweight.2.1. magazine-fed. cycle of operation. M16A3 Rifle Left Side 6-1 AUG 2003 . shoulderfired weapon designed for either automatic or semiautomatic fire through the use of a selector lever. Barrel Front Sight Assembly Slip Ring Carrying Handle Rear Sight Assembly Charging Handle Compensator Bayonet Stud Bolt Catch Trigger Selector Lever Lower Level Swivel Figure 6-1.1 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M16 (series) rifle and information necessary to understand the M16’s technical characteristics. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling.2 CHAPTER 6 M16 (Series) Rifle 6. air-cooled.NTRP 3-07.2 M16 (Series) Rifle Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M16 (series) rifle are defined in Figure 6-3.1.

the remaining parts of the weapon include: 1. extraction. 6. Bolt Carrier Group. Provides stripping.2.3. and the magazine group assembly. the bolt and bolt carrier assembly.2 Rear Sight Assembly Forward Assist Assembly Ejection Port Cover Hand Guard Receiver Pivot Pin Pistol Grip Magazine Catch Upper Level Swivel Butt Stock Magazine Figure 6-2. The magazine consists of housing. Bolt and Bolt Carrier Assembly.1 Upper Receiver The upper receiver assembly is attached to the barrel and contains the bolt carrier group. locking.NTRP 3-07. 6. firing.3.2 Lower Receiver The lower receiver assembly is attached to the buttstock and contains the trigger housing group. and follower spring. and Magazine Group Assembly In addition to the parts of the M16 (series) rifle described in Figures 6-4 and 6-5. 6. AUG 2003 6-2 . chambering. base plate follower. the lower receiver assembly (see Figure 6-5).1. Provides quick reload capabilities for sustained firing. Holds cartridges ready for feeding and provides a guide for positioning cartridges for stripping.3 Bolt.3.1.1. using the drive springs and projectile propelling gases for power. 2. M16A3 Rifle Right Side 6.3 M16 (Series) Rifle Major Components The M16 (series) rifle has four major component groups. Magazine Group Assembly. and ejection of cartridges.1. the upper receiver assembly (see Figure 6-4).

2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (empty) Overall Length MODEL M16A3 1005-01-357-5112 Colt Firearms Gas operated Double-stacked box 20 or 30 rounds 7.640 ft (500 m) 11.2.600 m) 5.016 mm) (with suppressor) 21 in (533 mm) 3. Ammunition.804 ft (550 m) 11. Logistics.4 lb (3. buttstock closed 14.75 in (756 mm).NTRP 3-07.4 kg) 40 in (1. and Safeties 6-3 AUG 2003 .811 ft (3.970 fps (905 mps) 1.100 fps (945 mps) 1.56 mm 90 rounds per minute 45 rounds per minute 12 to 15 rounds per minute Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range Caliber Cyclic Rate of Fire (automatic) Cyclic Rate of Fire (semiauto) Sustained Rate of Fire In-Service Date Life Expectancy Technical Manual # Operator Manual # 1992 25.811 ft (3.4 lb (2.56 mm 90 rounds per minute 45 rounds per minute 12 to 15 rounds per minute LOGISTICS M4A1 1005-01-382-0953 Colt Firearms Gas operated Double-stacked box 20 or 30 rounds 6.0 in (838 mm).5 in (368 mm) 2.000 rounds TM 9-1005-319-23&P SW370-BUJ-OPI-010 Selector Lever Ball (M855 and M193) Tracer (M856 and M196) Blank (M200) Dummy (M199) X X X X X X Figure 6-3. M16 (Series) Rifle Specifications.000 rounds TM 9-1005-319-23&P SW370-BUJ-OPI-010 SAFETIES Selector Lever AMMUNITION 1994 25.600 m) 5.9 kg) 33. buttstock open 29.

the appropriate remedial action will be based on the cause of the malfunction or stoppage. Area from which spent casing is ejected. Cocks weapon.2 UPPER RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PART Hand Guard Front Sight Assembly Compensator Carrying Handle Charging Handle Slip Ring Forward Assist Assembly Rear Sight Assembly Ejection Port Upper Level Swivel Bayonet Stud Ejection Port Cover Barrel CHARACTERISTICS Contains heat-resisting inner shields. Secures bayonet. Prevents muzzle rise. The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M16 (series) rifle are listed in Figure 6-7. however. M16 (Series) Rifle Upper Receiver Assembly M16 (series) rifles vary in performance and design from model to model. It is important to understand. 6. 6.1. Both malfunctions and stoppages are discussed in the next two sections.1. Proper care and preventive maintenance will help ensure the rifle’s serviceability. AUG 2003 6-4 . Therefore. Retains the hand guard.2. Protects upper receiver from foreign matter when weapon is not in use. Figure 6-6 summarizes the specific differences by model.5 Introduction to Remedial Action The M16 (series) rifle is an effective and reliable weapon.NTRP 3-07. Provides means for hand-carrying the weapon. Secures small arms sling. Chambers the cartridge for firing and directs the projectile.4 Cycle of Operation for the M16 (Series) Rifle It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation to ensure the M16 (series) rifle is readily available for action. Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition. Zeros weapon. Adjustable for elevation. Figure 6-4. Ensures bolt is fully forward and locked. that there is no one set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur.

NTRP 3-07.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the rifle to fire satisfactorily or to perform as designed. Stoppages are normally discovered when the rifle will not fire. Aids in disassembly. the rifle must be repaired by an armorer. use the procedures described in Figure 6-8.2.4. Protects trigger. follow the procedures described in Figure 6-7. To keep the M16 (series) rifle in action. Adjustable for M4A1.5.” 6.1.1 Bolt Is Forward To return the weapon to operation.3 Introduction to Remedial Action To perform remedial action. 2. Initiates firing sequence. 6-5 AUG 2003 .1. a malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. Holds bolt to rear after last round is fired. M16 (Series) Rifle Lower Receiver Assembly 6. it is important to clear any stoppage as quickly as possible. 6. Selects firing mode. Provides firing control and storage for basic cleaning gear.5. 3. Retains magazine and allows operator to release magazine. 1.5.2 LOWER RECEIVER ASSEMBLY PART Pistol Grip Trigger Trigger Guard Magazine Catch Selector Lever Bolt Catch Takedown Pin Receiver Pivot Pin Buttstock Provides positive handhold. Contains buffer assembly. 6. When a malfunction occurs. Lower level swivel. However.5.5.1. 4.2 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. It may be helpful to remember the acronym “SPORTS. Many stoppages can be prevented by properly caring for the M16 (series) rifle.1. Used to disassemble weapon. Proper care includes keeping the weapon clean and well lubricated.1.4 Common Stoppages/Corrective Actions The steps taken to clear the M16 (series) rifle are based on observation of the following three visual and one audible indicators. CHARACTERISTICS Figure 6-5. 6. Remedial actions to ensure weapon firing integrity follow.

0 in (533 mm) 14. M16 (Series) Rifle Differences Between Models STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Expansion of action spring sends buffer assembly and bolt carrier group forward with enough force to strip new round from magazine.640 ft (500 m) 1.970 fps (905 mps) Barrel Length 21. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor.5 lb (3. Pushing of the round into the chamber by the face of the bolt. Figure 6-7. forcing hammer down into receiver and compressing hammer spring. Alignment of the locking lugs on the bolt with the lugs on the barrel extension. Rotation of the bolt until the locking lugs no longer align with the lugs on the barrel extension.4 kg) Buttstock Fixed Collapsible Muzzle Velocity 3.5 in (368 mm) Firing Modes Semiautomatic Burst (3 round) Automatic Maximum Effective Range (point target) 1. M16 (Series) Rifle Cycle of Operation AUG 2003 6-6 .100 fps (945 mps) 2.79 lb (4 kg) 7.804 ft (550 m) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X M16A1 X M16A2 X M16A3 X X M4A1 Figure 6-6. Rearward movement of bolt carrier overrides hammer. Expulsion of the cartridge case by the ejector and spring.509 ft (460 m) 1. cocking hammer in firing position.NTRP 3-07. which forces the projectile out of the barrel.2.2 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS SPECIFICATION Weight (loaded) 8. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case.

Rotate selector lever to fire. Attempt to remove the magazine. Sight in and attempt to fire. Insert a filled magazine into the magazine well and tug downward on the magazine to ensure it is properly seated. Do not ride charging handle forward. Sight in and attempt to fire. Pull charging handle to the rear. Rotate the rifle so the top of the chamber is facing down. 6-7 AUG 2003 . M16 (Series) Rifle Stoppage Remedial Action Procedures 6. If the bolt will not lock to the rear: a.1. perform remedial action. Conduct a dry reload. A double feed occurs when two rounds are stuck in the receiver. 6. hold the charging handle to the rear to manually clear the round(s). 2. conduct a dry reload: 1. Press the magazine catch releasing the magazine. Pull the charging handle to the rear and then release it to allow the bolt to move forward and chamber a round.3 Brass Is Obstructing the Chamber Area Brass obstructing the chamber area usually indicates a double feed or a failure to eject. Tap forward assist. Release the charging handle to feed new round.NTRP 3-07. Figure 6-8. Observe ejection of case or cartridge. If weapon does not fire. remove the empty magazine.2 Bolt Is Locked to the Rear To return the weapon to operation. 3. Attempt to lock the bolt to the rear. 2.5. Shoot.4. 5. b. To return the weapon to operation: 1. and stow it on person if time permits. Rotate selector lever to safe. 4.4. Perform remedial action if chamber is obstructed.2 REMEDIAL ACTION PROCEDURES — SPORTS Phase One S P O Phase Two R T S Slap upward on magazine to ensure it is seated. 3.5. 7.2. If the round(s) do not shake free. 6. Hold the charging handle to the rear and shake the rifle to free the round(s).1. Visually inspect chamber area for obstruction. 4. c. Attempt to fire weapon.

like other Navy weapons. d. b.NTRP 3-07. Place the rifle on safe. Conduct a dry reload. when consistently applied. Raise the nonfiring hand for assistance from range personnel. Inspect the bore for an obstruction from the muzzle end. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M16 (series) rifle are defined in Figure 6-9.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M16 (Series) Rifle The M16 (series) rifle’s safety status is defined. f. The standardized procedures included in this section.2 6.5. e. If an audible pop/reduced recoil is experienced during firing.2. To clear the rifle. Combat environment. perform the following steps: a. Point the rifle downrange.4. Place the rifle in Condition 4. The range personnel will take control of the weapon and check for a bore obstruction. AUG 2003 6-8 . Lock the bolt to the rear. 2. b. will maximize safety during weapon handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon. immediately cease fire and perform the following steps: a.2 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of readiness. e. The tactical situation may dictate that correction of an audible pop/reduced recoil is necessary. Training environment. 6. check for a bore obstruction only after waiting a minimum of 10 seconds to ensure a hangfire did not occur. Insert a cleaning rod or another field expedient into the bore and clear the obstruction. This is sometimes accompanied by excessive smoke escaping from the chamber area. General weapon condition codes are listed in Chapter 1. and safety features specific to the M16 (series) rifle. Sight in and attempt to fire. It is normally identifiable by a lower report and reduced recoil. When not sure why a stoppage has occurred. tagged.4 Audible Pop/Reduced Recoil An audible pop occurs when only a portion of the propellant is ignited. by four weapon condition codes. boxed. 1. personnel should err on the side of safety. 6.1. c. and shipped to Crane Division Naval Surface Warfare Center. the weapon will be removed from the firing line. Figure 1-2. If there is a bore obstruction. d.2. operation. c.

Attempt to place the selector lever in the safe position (weapon must be cocked before safety can be engaged). 6. Figure 6-10.2. magazine inserted.NTRP 3-07.2. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4.2. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. ejection port cover closed.3. and grease.3 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle on the Range The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 6-10 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. unloading. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M16 (series) rifle. Not applicable. and employment of any weapon. ejection port cover closed. The commands set forth in Figure 6-10. M16 (Series) Rifle Weapon Handling Commands 6-9 AUG 2003 . M16 (Series) Rifle Weapon Condition Codes 6. check the weapon for dirt. 6. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. when consistently and properly used. bolt forward. Figure 6-9. excess oil. Note Before loading the M16 (series) rifle.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. chamber empty. 2. Stop target engagement. Visually and physically verify that the firearm is clear and safe. magazine removed. Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects. Engage the target. round in chamber.2 CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Safety on. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. COMMAND Load Make Ready Load and Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. bolt forward. Lock the bolt to the rear. With a supervisor.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M16 (Series) Rifle Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. chamber empty. Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. bolt forward. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. Safety on. Safety on. magazine inserted.2.

Grip the hand guard firmly with the nonfiring hand. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine.NTRP 3-07. pull the charging handle slightly to the rear and visually inspect the chamber. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well.2. and release. 5. insert a magazine into the magazine well. which can. Note To ensure ammunition has been chambered. Ensure selector lever is in the safe position.2. Check the sights to ensure proper battle sight zero. 4. 6. 6. Attempt to place the selector lever in the safe position (weapon must be cocked before safety can be engaged).3 Procedures to LOAD AND MAKE READY On the command LOAD AND MAKE READY. 6. b. While maintaining the muzzle in a safe direction. 3. in turn. pull the charging handle fully to the rear and release. Do not walk the bolt forward. While pointing the muzzle of the firearm in a safe direction. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. and general serviceability. pull the charging handle with the firing hand to its rearmost position. cause a stoppage. and release. Ensure the magazine is fully seated. 4. Visually and physically verify that the firearm is clear and safe. While pointing the muzzle in a safe direction. Lock the bolt to the rear. AUG 2003 6-10 . Ensure the bolt is fully forward and that the magazine is filled.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. Grip the pistol grip firmly with the firing hand. pull the charging handle with the nonfiring hand to its rearmost position. 2. release the bolt forward. Ensure the ejection port cover is closed.3.2. 2. There are two methods of doing this: a. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds. correct rear sight aperture.2 3. Close the ejection port cover (if time and the situation permit). Ensure the selector lever is in the safe position. known distance.3. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1.

in turn. Take the rifle off safe. releasing control of the magazine early can cause it to fall out of the magazine well.3. known distance. 6. 4. 3. pull the charging handle slightly to the rear and visually inspect the chamber. Place the weapon on safe. correct rear sight aperture.5 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE.3. Note To ensure ammunition has been chambered. Squeeze the trigger to engage the target. Rotate the rifle so the ejection port is facing the deck. Close the ejection port cover (if time and situation permit). 6. 6-11 AUG 2003 . While pointing the muzzle in a safe direction. cause a stoppage. Check the sights to ensure proper battle sight zero. ensure the weapon is on safe.4 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE.6 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD.3. Ensure the magazine is fully seated. Slapping the bottom of the magazine can dislodge rounds. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person.NTRP 3-07. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1. personnel shall perform the following steps: 1.2 3.2. insert a magazine into the magazine well. Place the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 3. 2. Ensure the bolt is fully forward and that the magazine is filled. 6.2.2. Do not walk the bolt forward. • • Due to the weight of a fully filled magazine. While maintaining the muzzle in a safe direction. 2. which can. Aim the rifle. and general serviceability. 6. release the bolt forward.2. While pointing the muzzle of the firearm in a safe direction. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. 5. 2.

Check the sights. Lock the bolt to the rear.2. inspect. Close the ejection port cover. While pointing the muzzle in a safe direction. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD.2 4. inspect. Release the charging handle and observe the bolt moving forward on an empty chamber. Show Clear. 6. 9. release the charging handle and observe the bolt moving forward on an empty chamber. Have another person inspect the rifle to ensure no ammunition is present.) 11. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. 6. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine. 8. 8. Unload or Unload. 3.2. 5. 5. Recover. Ensure the magazine well and chamber are empty and no ammunition is present. 6. SHOW CLEAR. The clearing barrel supervisor will read each command slowly and clearly while closely monitoring the process. At every duty station. Recover. 2. 6. The following procedures should always be followed prior to using a clearing barrel: AUG 2003 6-12 . 11. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch. Close the ejection port cover. 4. 10. 9.NTRP 3-07. 10. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Lock the bolt to the rear. After receiving acknowledgment that the rifle is clear. (Omit this step at night. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch.) 12.3 SAFE WEAPON HANDLING PROCEDURES FOR THE M16 (SERIES) RIFLE AT THE CLEARING BARREL The sole purpose of a clearing barrel is to provide a safe direction in which to point a weapon when performing any or all of the following functions: Load. ensure the weapon is on safe. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine.7 Procedures to UNLOAD. Put the rifle on safe now if it would not go on safe earlier. 7. (Omit this step at night. written clearing barrel procedures shall be posted near the clearing barrel. Rotate the rifle so the ejection port is facing the deck. Check the sights. Ensure the magazine well and chamber are empty and no ammunition is present. Put the rifle on safe now if it would not go on safe earlier.3. 7.

Close the ejection port cover. Check the sights. 4. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1.1 LOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle On the supervisor’s command LOAD.2. Visually and physically verify that the firearm is safe and clear. 5. Ensure the magazine well and chamber are empty and no ammunition is present.3. Lock the bolt to the rear. Attempt to place the selector lever in the safe position (weapon must be cocked before safety can be engaged). personnel will. Clear unnecessary personnel away from clearing barrel.NTRP 3-07. 3. 3. Know what is behind/adjacent to clearing barrel. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. Ensure the bolt is fully forward. release the bolt forward. (Omit this step at night. While maintaining the muzzle in the clearing barrel. 8. 6. 6-13 AUG 2003 . Ensure the magazine is fully seated. Put the rifle on safe if it would not go on safe earlier.2 1.3. 5. 9. 3. Inspect general condition of clearing barrel. 10. Close the ejection port cover. Pull the charging handle and lock the bolt to the rear. Ensure the rifle is on safe.2 UNLOAD Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch. one at a time. 4. Ensure the selector lever is in the safe position. Rotate the rifle so the ejection port is facing the deck. follow the directions described below.) 11. 2. inspect. 2. 6. Do not walk the bolt forward. with trigger finger straight along the receiver and with the rifle pointed in the clearing barrel. Insert a magazine into the magazine well. Recover. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Release the charging handle and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. 6. 7. with trigger finger straight along the receiver and with the rifle pointed in the clearing barrel. personnel will. 6. 2. Personnel line up at the clearing barrel and. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine.

NTRP 3-07. Lock the bolt to the rear. 8.1 Weapon Transfer From One Person to Another Proper weapon handling is required every time a person passes a weapon to another person or receives a weapon from another person. 6.4 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific instruction that. 5. 6.4. perform the following procedures. SHOW CLEAR Clearing Barrel Procedures for the M16 (Series) Rifle On the supervisor’s command UNLOAD. 2. Check the sights. 5.2. 7. Return the magazine to the magazine pouch and fasten the pouch.1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon Personnel transferring the weapon shall: 1. Recover.1. 2.3 UNLOAD.4. will promote the safe handling of the M16 (series) rifle between personnel and during movement with the weapon. and return any ejected ammunition to the magazine. (Omit this step at night. Remove the magazine from the rifle and stow it on person. 6. 9. release the charging handle and observe the bolt moving forward on an empty chamber. SHOW CLEAR. with trigger finger straight along the receiver and with the rifle pointed in the clearing barrel. personnel will. AUG 2003 6-14 . Ensure the weapon is on safe. Ensure the magazine well and chamber are empty and no ammunition is present. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty and no ammunition is present. inspect. Leave the bolt locked to the rear and hand the weapon to the person receiving the weapon. 4. when consistently applied. Put the rifle on safe now if it would not go on safe earlier. 10. Rotate the rifle so the ejection port is facing the deck. After receiving acknowledgment that the rifle is clear. 11. This everyday occurrence must take place with the same safety considerations expected on a live fire range. 3. Ensure the rifle is on safe.) 12. Lock the bolt to the rear. Have another person inspect the rifle to ensure no ammunition is present. To properly pass a weapon between personnel. 4. Remove the magazine if it is present. 3. 6. perform the following steps to take the rifle from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Close the ejection port cover.2 6.3.

This transport is used primarily during periods of inclement weather to keep moisture out of the bore of the rifle. 4.1. 6.1 M16 (Series) Rifle Transports Transports.2. It permits control of the rifle while moving and still allows quick engagement of the enemy.4.1. They are also used whenever both hands are needed for other work. 2.2. in which the rifle is slung over the back or shoulder.1 Tactical Carry The tactical carry is used when no immediate threat is present.4. 6-15 AUG 2003 . concurrently. 6.4.2. each is described below. if necessary. All three carries permit quick engagement when necessary.2.NTRP 3-07.1 Strong Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Up) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely.2 Weak Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Down) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and contact with the enemy is unlikely. Unless the situation dictates otherwise.4. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 6.4.2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon Personnel receiving the weapon shall: 1. 3.4.1. Ensure the rifle is on safe. There are three carries for the M16 (series) rifle: the tactical.2. staying prepared to engage a threat. 6. To perform this carry: 1.4. the weapon is slung with the muzzle down to prevent pointing the muzzle in an unsafe direction. Release the bolt catch and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. There are three weapons transports.1. The weapon is slung across the back with the muzzle up or down. the alert. the firing hand around the pistol grip. Visually inspect the magazine well and chamber to ensure they are empty and no ammunition is present. and the ready. Place the nonfiring hand on the hand guard. The weapon is slung over the strong shoulder with the muzzle pointed up. The weapon is slung over the weak shoulder with the muzzle pointed down.2 6.4. 6. 6. Close the ejection port cover. The procedures for transporting and carrying the M16 (series) rifle follow.2.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M16 (Series) Rifle Specific instruction governing movement of the M16 (series) rifle will ensure personnel move safely with the weapon while.2 M16 (Series) Rifle Carries Weapons carries are designed to place personnel in a state of increased readiness as the threat level increases.3 Cross Body Sling Arms (Muzzle Up or Down) This transport may be used when both hands are required for work.2. 6.2. are used when no immediate threat is present and are especially useful when moving for long periods.

4. AUG 2003 6-16 . 2.2.1 Presenting From Strong Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Up) 1. Level the rifle while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. pull the rifle forward off the shoulder with the nonfiring hand.4.NTRP 3-07. pull it to its rearmost position. Angle the barrel of the rifle upward about 45 degrees in the general direction of the enemy. 6. 3. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver.2 2. Lower the rifle sights to just below eye level so a clear field of view is maintained until a target has been identified. At the same time. 2.3.3 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when contact with the enemy is imminent. 4. with the muzzle angled down about 45 degrees and pointed in the likely direction of the enemy. Do not move the head down to meet the stock of the rifle. At the same time. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of the rifle from the shoulder. Reach under the strong arm with the nonfiring hand between the sling and the body and grasp the hand guard. and release. the firing hand around the pistol grip. Take rifle off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. 6. 4.2. 6. with the muzzle of the rifle pointed in the direction of enemy contact. Position the muzzle slightly below eye level. establish the firing position. 2. To perform this carry: 1. grasp the charging handle with the firing hand. Place the nonfiring hand on the hand guard.2. when the strong arm is free of the sling and the rifle clears all personal gear.2.3 Procedures to Present the M16 (Series) Rifle The procedures that follow provide two methods to efficiently take the M16 (series) rifle from a transport to a firing stance. Place the buttstock of the rifle in shoulder. Roll the strong shoulder forward and release the sling from the firing hand once the hand guard has cleared the elbow. The ready allows immediate target engagement. Ensure wherever the eyes move. To perform this carry: 1. 3. the firing hand around the pistol grip. muzzle. 6. Place the nonfiring hand on the hand guard. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 6. pull down on the sling and raise the strong elbow out and parallel to the deck. Place the buttstock of the rifle in shoulder.4. While looking at the target. the muzzle also moves (eyes. Continue pulling the rifle forward with the nonfiring hand while rotating the rifle parallel to the deck. Engagement of the enemy is faster from the alert than from the tactical carry. target). and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 5.2 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when enemy contact is likely (probable).4. Place the buttstock of the rifle (if extended) along the body’s firing side at approximately hip level.2.

5. Grasp the sling with the firing hand to prevent the rifle from falling off the shoulder. 6. and release. While looking at the target. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operators Manual. Grasp the hand guard with the nonfiring hand (the index finger points toward the muzzle).2. 8.NTRP 3-07.5 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4.2 Presenting From Weak Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Down) 1. Continue extending the rifle toward the target to ensure the rifle clears all personal gear.6 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the M16 (series) rifle. Level the rifle while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. 6. M16 (series) rifle is issued from and returned to the armory. 6-17 AUG 2003 . As the rifle sights settle. visually locate the target through the rear sight aperture. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of the rifle from the shoulder.2 7. shift the focus back to the front sight post to obtain sight alignment and place the tip of the front sight post center mass on the target to obtain sight picture.3. Do not move the head down to meet the stock of the rifle. Rotate the rifle counterclockwise while extending the muzzle toward the target (clockwise for left-handed shooters). 6. Take the rifle off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. As the sights become level with the aiming eye. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver. bolt locked to the rear. visually locate the target through the rear sight aperture. 7. SW370-BUJ-OPI-010. 2. Establish firing position. 6.7 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on rifle marksmanship refer to MCRP 3-01A. 9. 3. 4. 6. As the sights become level with the aiming eye. As the rifle sights settle.4. shift the focus back to the front sight post to obtain sight alignment and place the tip of the front sight post center mass on the target to obtain sight picture. Grasp the charging handle with the firing hand. pull it to its rearmost position.

2.NTRP 3-07.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 6-18 .

shown mounted in Figure 7-1 and shown separate in Figure 7-2.1 Description of the M203 Grenade Launcher The M203 grenade launcher. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. and firing mechanism.2 CHAPTER 7 M203 Grenade Launcher 7.1 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M203 grenade launcher and information necessary to understand the M203’s technical characteristics. and a receiver assembly housing the barrel latch.2. Figure 7-2 displays the M203 trigger and safety mechanism in detail. M203 Grenade Launcher Mounted 7-1 AUG 2003 .NTRP 3-07. compact. breech-loading. cycle of operation. and remedial actions. It is a lightweight. single-shot launcher. The launcher consists of a hand guard and sight assembly with an adjustable metallic folding blade sight assembly. 7. major components. is a single-shot weapon designed for use with the M16A3 rifle and fires a 40mm grenade. Leaf Sight Assembly Hand Guard Assembly Quadrant Sight Assembly Barrel Assembly Receiver Assembly Figure 7-1. barrel stop. a plastic hand guard.1. pumpaction.

4.4.1.3 M203 Grenade Launcher Major Components The M203 has five major components. the following precautions must be observed until the round has been removed from the weapon and the cause of the failure has been determined: AUG 2003 7-2 .1. A malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. and Stoppages for the M203 Grenade Launcher To keep the M203 in action.2.1.2 Trigger Safety Figure 7-2. Stoppages are normally discovered when the M203 will not fire.2 M203 Grenade Launcher Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M203 are listed in Figure 7-3. as described in Figure 7-4.3 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. 7.1 Cycle of Operation The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M203 are listed in Figure 7-5.2 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the M203 to function satisfactorily or to perform as designed.NTRP 3-07. 7. M203 Grenade Launcher 7. When a malfunction occurs. the weapon may have to be repaired by an armorer. 7. Due to the possibility of a misfire (a failure to fire) or hangfire (a delay in propellant charge ignition). Malfunctions.4.1.1.4 Cycle of Operation.1. 7. it is important to understand the routine cycle of operation and be prepared to recognize and correct stoppages and malfunctions. 7.

Provides range selection from 50 to 250 meters in 50-meter increments.000 rounds SW370-AE-MMI-010 TM 9-1010-221-10 B509 Yellow Smoke B534 MP B536 White Star Cluster B567 and BA05 CS B569 HE Technical manual # Operator manual # SAFETIES Figure 7-3. Chambered for special 40mm grenade launcher ammunition.4 kg) 16 in (406 mm) 12 in (305 mm) 246 fps (75 mps) Area target: 1.312 ft (400 m) Combat situation: 102 ft (31 m) Training situation: 427 ft (130 m) Caliber 40mm. Houses the firing mechanism and ejection system and supports the barrel assembly.NTRP 3-07. Provides range selection from 50 to 400 meters in 25-meter increments.2.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range Minimum Safe Range M203 1010-00-179-6447 Colt Manufacturing Company Single Shot N/A 1 round 3 lb (1. and Safeties MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Hand Guard Assembly Quadrant Sight Assembly Receiver Assembly Barrel Assembly FUNCTION Fits over the barrel of the M16A3 rifle.148 ft (350 m) Point target: 492 ft (150 m) 1. M203 Grenade Launcher Specifications. Consists of a specially treated aluminum barrel and plastic handgrip assembly. Attached to the carrying handle of the M16A3 rifle. The assembly slides forward and backward under the receiver assembly in the sliding tracks. Mounts to the underside of the M16A3 rifle. Ammunition. Logistics. Located on top of the hand guard assembly. M203 Grenade Launcher Major Components 7-3 AUG 2003 . Leaf Sight Assembly Figure 7-4. Made of molded plastic. low velocity Manual switch In-service date Life expectancy B504 Green Star B506 Red Smoke AMMUNITION B505 Red Star B508 Green Smoke B519 Practice B535 White Star B546 HEDP B568 HE B577 TP LOGISTICS 1971 10.

keep the round separate from other ammunition until it can be properly disposed of. 7.2 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of readiness. operation. The round may be reloaded and fired after the cause for the failure to fire has been corrected. unloading. 6. 2. The standardized procedures included in this section. who will determine the cause. shout “misfire.NTRP 3-07. and employment of any weapon. Before attempting to remove the round from the launcher. In a combat situation. Open breech and remove round. 7.2. personnel not required for the operation must move from the vicinity. The commands set forth in Figure 7-7. determine whether the round or the firing mechanism is defective. Wait 30 seconds from the time of failure to fire before opening the breech for unloading purposes. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2.” and keep the weapon trained on the target and all personnel clear of the muzzle. when consistently applied. If the primer has not been dented. See the armorer. After the round has been removed (either by unloading and catching the round or by unloading close to the ground for a short fall). AUG 2003 7-4 .2. like other Navy weapons. Keep muzzle on target and clear all personnel from the area (at least 80 meters or 264 feet). will result in the safe and proficient handling of the M203 grenade launcher and the M16A3 rifle. A dented primer is a hangfire. Wait 30 seconds before removing round. In training situations. by four weapon condition codes. the weapon should be cleared rapidly.2 1. In a tactical situation. Exercise extreme caution during unloading procedures.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M203 Grenade Launcher Weapon handling commands are issued by the supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. will maximize safety during weapons handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon. Handle accordingly. Store the round at a safe distance away from serviceable ammunition until it is determined whether the round or the weapon is defective. If the primer has been dented (a hangfire).2. using common sense and staying within the safety parameters as much as the tactical situation permits. 7. Examine the primer to see if it has been dented.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M203 Grenade Launcher and M16A3 Rifle The M203’s safety status is defined. carry the round back to friendly lines so the enemy cannot use it. then the firing mechanism is faulty. and safety features specific to the M203 grenade launcher. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M203 are defined in Figure 7-6. 5. See the armorer. 4. when consistently and properly used. 3.

Stop target engagement. As the barrel assembly is opened. when depressed. unlocks the barrel assembly so that it can be moved forward along the receiver assembly. Figure 7-7. Weapon is free of ammunition. The weapon is cocked when the barrel assembly is opened. the barrel latch becomes engaged to the barrel assembly and the cocking lever engages the barrel extension so that it cannot be moved forward along the receiver assembly. Engage the target. There is no Condition 3 for the M203. safety is on. As the breech end of the barrel assembly closes.NTRP 3-07. Depressing the barrel latch and sliding the barrel assembly forward. The barrel latch. Figure 7-6.2. M203 Grenade Launcher and M16A3 Rifle Weapon Handling Commands 7-5 AUG 2003 . Chambering takes place during closing of the barrel assembly. Extraction and cocking take place at the same time. Spring-loaded ejector pushes the expended cartridge case or live round from the barrel assembly. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. As the barrel assembly closes.2 STEP Firing Unlocking Extracting ACTION Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. safety is on. barrel latched down. which forces the projectile out of the barrel. Not Applicable. Take the M203 from Condition 1 to Condition 4. M203 Grenade Launcher Cycle of Operation CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Round inserted. M203 Grenade Launcher Weapon Condition Codes COMMAND Load Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. the cartridge is inserted into the breech end of the barrel. There is no Condition 2 for the M203. When the barrel assembly is in the open position. Ejecting Cocking Feeding Chambering Locking Figure 7-5. a spring-loaded extractor keeps the spent cartridge seated against the receiver until the barrel is clear of the cartridge case. Requires a second person to check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present in either the M203 or the M16A3 before it is placed in Condition 4. Not Applicable. barrel latched down. the extractor contacts the rim of the cartridge and the round is firmly seated in the chamber.

recover.4 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD. 3. personnel shall place the trigger finger straight along the receiver and place the weapon on safe. 2. Ensure the M203 is in Condition 4. taking care to ensure it is snug in place and will not fall out. Elevate the weapon and visually and physically ensure that the chamber is clear. 4. 7. 7. 4. and retain any live rounds ejected.2 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE.4. personnel shall aim the M203.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD.3 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE.NTRP 3-07.2. Place the hand under the breech to catch the round as it is ejected. Slide the barrel down until it locks in place. 1. Clear the M16A3.3 Safe Handling Safety Considerations The warnings listed below in Figure 7-8. 1.2. Depress the barrel latch and slide the barrel forward. place the M203 on safe (if not already on safe).2. 5. With the barrel assembly open.4. will assist personnel with safely handling the M203 grenade launcher. when followed.2. inspect. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M203 from Condition 4 to Condition 1.2. AUG 2003 7-6 . 2. take the weapon off safe. 7.4. 3.4. 5. 7. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M203 from Condition 1 to Condition 4.2. Physically inspect the weapon to be sure the round is seated correctly by pushing forward on the barrel. 7. Press the barrel latch and slide the barrel forward. Close the breech. Place the M203 and the M16A3 on safe. 6.2.2 7.4 Safe Handling Procedures for the M203 Grenade Launcher on the Range The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 7-7 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. and pull the trigger to engage the target. place a round into the breech.

2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS AND WARNINGS Do not point muzzle in direction of personnel when loading. place the M16A3 in Condition 4. zeroing. Use of unauthorized high-explosive 40mm cartridges can result in injury or death. inspect. Doing so can result in injury to. 8. or firing grenade launcher. clearing. 7-7 AUG 2003 . Clear line of fire of all obstructions that will endanger personnel when weapon is fired. Note Danger radius of the practice grenade is 20 meters (66 ft). Safe Handling Warnings for the M203 Grenade Launcher 7. 5. Weapon must be carried in a closed and locked position with safety on. Place the hand under the breech to catch the round as it is ejected.2. 3. Depress the barrel latch and slide the barrel forward. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. or death of. Be sure safety is in safe position after loading grenade launcher. personnel. 2. Have another person inspect the M203 and the M16A3 to ensure no ammunition is present. Do not interchange barrel assemblies or components from one weapon to another. After closing the breech on the M203. 4. Do not engage targets within 130-meter (427 ft) radius of unprotected friendly troops. Place the M203 and the M16A3 on safe.5 Procedures to UNLOAD. Be in a protected position when firing the grenades at targets within 130 meters (427 ft). Elevate the weapon and visually and physically ensure that the chamber is clear. Do not fire canopy smoke cartridges so that a falling ignited projectile could descend upon friendly troops. Use only authorized rounds. 7. Do not squeeze trigger and remove safety at the same time.NTRP 3-07. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M203 from Condition 1 to Condition 4: 1. causing injury to personnel and/or damage to material. SHOW CLEAR. Do not carry weapon in open position. After receiving acknowledgment that the M203 and the M16A3 are clear. Clear the M16A3. Figure 7-8. Projectiles assembled with M552 (T333) fuzes will arm within 3 meters (10 ft) of weapon. and retain any ejected ammunition. Do not use or fire cartridges other than those authorized for the 40mm M203 grenade launcher. recover. Such action will result in injury to.2.4. or death of. 6. personnel.

2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon The person receiving the weapon shall: 1. The procedures for transporting and carrying the M203 follow.3 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific instructions that. Leave the bolt locked to the rear and hand the weapon to the person receiving the weapon.1. 7. Lock the bolt to the rear. Release the bolt catch and observe the bolt going forward on an empty chamber. Ensure the M203 is on safe. when consistently applied. staying prepared to engage a threat. Open the breech of the M203 and visually inspect the chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. 3. This everyday occurrence must take place with the same safety considerations expected on a live fire range. 7. 6.3. AUG 2003 7-8 . To properly pass a weapon between personnel.NTRP 3-07.1 Weapons Transfers From One Person to Another Proper weapon handling is required every time a person passes a weapon to another person or receives a weapon from another person. 4. 3. Remove the magazine if it is present. the following procedures must be performed. 4.1. 5. Ensure that the M16A3 is on safe.2. Visually inspect the chamber on the M16A3 to ensure there is no ammunition present.3. Close the ejection port cover. 7. 7. Visually inspect the chamber on the M203 to ensure there is no ammunition present. 7. 2. 6.3. 7. 2.1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon The person handing off the weapon shall: 1. will promote the safe handling of the M203 between personnel and during movement with the weapon.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M203 Grenade Launcher Specific instruction governing movement of the M203 will ensure personnel move safely with the weapon while. concurrently.3. Ensure that the M203 is on safe. Visually inspect the chamber on the M16A3 to ensure that no ammunition is present. Ensure the M16A3 is on safe.2 7. Close the breech on the M203 and ensure it is latched in place. 5.

7.1.3.2 M203 Grenade Launcher Carries Weapons carries are designed to place personnel in a state of increased readiness as the threat level increases. the firing hand around the pistol grip.2 Weak Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Down) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and contact with the enemy is unlikely.NTRP 3-07. 7. Engagement of the enemy is faster from the alert than from the tactical carry.1. are used when no immediate threat is present and are especially useful when moving for long periods.3. The transports. the alert.2. This transport is mainly used during periods of inclement weather to keep moisture out of the bore of the rifle. The weapon carries for the M203 are the same as for the M16A3 rifle: the tactical.1. unless the situation dictates otherwise.3. 7.2 7.2. 7-9 AUG 2003 . muzzle. The tactical permits control of the rifle while moving and still allows quick engagement of the enemy. 3.3.2. Place the buttstock of the rifle (if extended) along the side of the body at approximately hip level.3 Cross Body Sling Arms (Muzzle Up or Down) This transport may be used when both hands are required for work. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. All three carries permit quick engagement when necessary. 7.2 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when enemy contact is likely (probable). if necessary.1 M203 Grenade Launcher Transports The weapon transports for the M203 are the same as for the M16A3 rifle.2. The weapon is slung across the back with the muzzle up or down. There are three weapons transports.1 Strong Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Up) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely. Angle the barrel of the rifle upward about 45 degrees in the general direction of the enemy. Place the buttstock of the rifle in the shoulder. The weapon is slung over the strong shoulder with the muzzle pointed up. with the muzzle angled down about 45 degrees and pointed in the likely direction of the enemy. Place the nonfiring hand on the hand guard. To perform the alert carry: 1.2.2. the firing hand around the pistol grip.3. 4. 7.2. They are also used whenever both hands are needed for other work.1 Tactical Carry The tactical carry is used when no immediate threat is present.2. and the ready. To perform the tactical carry: 1.2. Place the nonfiring hand on the hand guard. Ensure wherever the eyes move. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. The weapon is slung over the weak shoulder with the muzzle pointed down.2. in which the rifle is slung over the back or shoulder. 2. 2. Normally. target).3.3. 7. the muzzle moves (eyes. the weapon is slung with the muzzle down to prevent pointing the muzzle in an unsafe direction. Position the muzzle slightly below eye level.

7.2 7. While looking at the target. Lower the rifle sights to just below eye level so a clear field of view is maintained until a target has been identified. Continue pulling the rifle forward with the nonfiring hand while rotating the rifle parallel to the deck. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of the rifle from the shoulder. 4. Reach under the strong arm with the nonfiring hand between the sling and the body and grasp the hand guard. While looking at the target. pull down on the sling and raise the strong elbow out and parallel to the deck. For targets within 50 meters. 2. 7. When the strong arm is free of the sling and the rifle clears all personal gear. Load the M203. use front and rear sight of the quadrant sight only.3 Procedures to Present the M203 Grenade Launcher The procedures that follow provide two methods to efficiently take the M203 from a transport to a firing stance.2. Estimate the distance and aim head high on the target. 3. 2. raise leaf sight and use with rifle front sight. Do not move the head down to meet the stock of the rifle.3. Roll the strong shoulder forward and release the sling from the firing hand once the hand guard has cleared the elbow. 2.3.2. 7. with the muzzle of the rifle pointed in the direction of enemy contact.3. Take the M203 off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger.2. AUG 2003 7-10 .2 Presenting From Weak Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Down) 1. For targets between 50 meters to 250 meters.3. establish the firing position.NTRP 3-07. For targets between 250 to 400 meters.3 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when contact with the enemy is imminent. 8. These procedures assume the M203 is in Condition 4. 5. Grasp the hand guard with the nonfiring hand (the index finger points toward the muzzle). Rotate the rifle counterclockwise while extending the muzzle toward the target (clockwise for left-handed shooters). 6. At the same time. Place the buttstock of the rifle in the shoulder. Place the nonfiring hand on the hand guard. Position the sight of the M203 as appropriate for the range to the target.3. pull the rifle forward off the shoulder with the nonfiring hand. 7. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of rifle from the shoulder. Grasp the sling with the firing hand to prevent the rifle from falling off the shoulder. Level the rifle while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. the firing hand around the pistol grip. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver. To perform the ready carry: 1. place leaf sight down and use rifle sights. At the same time.3. bringing it to Condition 1. 3.1 Presenting From Strong Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Up) 1. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 4. The ready allows immediate target engagement.

NTRP 3-07.2.2

5. Continue extending the rifle toward the target to ensure the rifle clears all personal gear. Establish firing position. 6. Load the M203, bringing it to Condition 1. 7. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver. Take the rifle off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. 8. Level the rifle while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. Do not move the head down to meet the stock of the rifle. 9. Position the sight the M203 as appropriate for the range to the target. For targets within 50 meters, place leaf sight down and use rifle sights. Estimate the distance and aim head high on the target. For targets between 50 to 250 meters, raise leaf sight and use with rifle front sight. For targets between 250 to 400 meters, use front and rear sight of the quadrant sight only. 7.4 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M203 grenade launcher is issued from and returned to the armory. 7.5 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the M203 grenade launcher, refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Technical Manual, SW 370-AE-MMI-010. 7.6 M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on grenade launcher marksmanship, refer to Operator’s Manual, TM 9-1010-221-10.

7-11

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

AUG 2003

7-12

NTRP 3-07.2.2

CHAPTER 8

M79 Grenade Launcher
8.1 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M79 grenade launcher and information necessary to understand the M79’s technical characteristics, major components, cycle of operation, and remedial actions. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. 8.1.1 Description of the M79 Grenade Launcher The M79 grenade launcher, shown in Figures 8-1 and 8-2, is a single-shot, break-open, shoulder-fired weapon. It is breech-loading and fires a 40mm grenade. The M79 has an open, fixed front sight and an open, adjustable rear sight. 8.1.2 M79 Grenade Launcher Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M79 are listed in Figure 8-3.

Barrel Locking Latch Lever

Stock

Barrel

Fore-end Assembly

Receiver Sling Swivel

Figure 8-1. M79 Grenade Launcher Left Side

8-1

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

Safety

Rear Leaf Sight

Front Sight

Trigger

Sling Swivel

Figure 8-2. M79 Grenade Launcher Right Side 8.1.3 M79 Grenade Launcher Major Components The M79 has five major components, as described in Figure 8-4. 8.1.4 Cycle of Operation, Malfunctions, and Stoppages for the M79 Grenade Launcher To keep the M79 in action, it is important to understand the routine cycle of operation and be prepared to recognize and correct stoppages and malfunctions. 8.1.4.1 Cycle of Operation The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M79 are listed in Figure 8-5. 8.1.4.2 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the M79 to function satisfactorily or to perform as designed. A malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. When a malfunction occurs, the weapon may have to be repaired by an armorer. 8.1.4.3 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. Stoppages are normally discovered when the M79 will not fire. Due to the possibility of a misfire (a failure to fire) or hangfire (a delay in propellant charge ignition), the following precautions must be observed until the round has been removed from the weapon and the cause of the failure has been determined: 1. In training situations, shout “misfire,” and keep the weapon trained on the target and all personnel clear of the muzzle. Before attempting to remove the round from the launcher, personnel not required for the operation must move from the vicinity.

AUG 2003

8-2

and Safeties MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Fore-end Assembly Barrel Receiver Stock Sling FUNCTION Used to open and close barrel.2. Made of fiberglass or wood and is attached to receiver. low velocity Manual switch In-service date Life expectancy B504 Green Star B506 Red Smoke AMMUNITION B505 Red Star B508 Green Smoke B519 Practice B535 White Star B546 HEDP B568 HE B577 TP B509 Yellow Smoke B534 MP B536 White Star Cluster B567 and BA05 CS B569 HE LOGISTICS 1960 10.312 ft (400 m) Combat situation: 102 ft (31 m) Training situation: 427 ft (130 m) Caliber 40mm.8 in (732 mm) 14 in (356 mm) 249 fps (76 mps) Area target: 1. Chambered for special 40mm grenade launcher ammunition. M79 Grenade Launcher Specifications. permitting loading and firing of weapon and ejection of spent cartridge. Used for carrying grenade launcher.148 ft (350 m) Point target: 492 ft (150 m) 1. M79 Grenade Launcher Major Components 8-3 AUG 2003 .000 rounds SW370-BD-OPI-24 TM 9-1010-205-10 SAFETIES Technical manual # Operator manual # Figure 8-3. Houses firing mechanism and supports barrel assembly.91 lb (2.7 kg) 28. Logistics.NTRP 3-07.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range Minimum Safe Range M79 1010-00-691-1382 Various Single-shot break-open N/A 1 round 5. Ammunition. Figure 8-4.

4. Wait 30 seconds before removing round. contacting a stud on hammer. Examine the primer to see if it has been dented. When barrel assembly is in the open position. determine whether the round or the firing mechanism is defective. Weapon is cocked when barrel assembly is opened. Keep muzzle on target and clear all personnel from the area (at least 80 meters or 264 feet). As barrel is opened. M79 Grenade Launcher Cycle of Operation 2. cartridge is inserted into breech end of the barrel. If the primer has not been dented. Barrel unlocks from receiver and moves safety to safe position. Store the round at a safe distance away from serviceable ammunition until it is determined whether the round or the weapon is defective. Wait 30 seconds from the time of failure to fire before opening the breech for unloading purposes. cocking arm lifts cocking lever and causes it to rotate around hammer pin. Open breech and remove round. Chambering takes place during closing of barrel assembly. Launcher is not equipped with an automatic ejector. extractor contacts rim of cartridge and round is firmly seated in chamber. locking barrel to receiver. spring-loaded extractor withdraws spent cartridge case about one-half inch from breech end of barrel. The round may be reloaded and fired after the cause for the failure to fire has been corrected. who will determine the cause. As barrel assembly closes. Cocking lever rotates upward with hammer until sear notch is engaged by sear. See the armorer. 3. A dented primer is a hangfire. Barrel-locking latch lever is pushed fully to the right. then the firing mechanism is faulty. latch lock is depressed. As breech end of barrel assembly closes. AUG 2003 8-4 . which forces projectile out of barrel.NTRP 3-07. See the armorer.2 STEP Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Ignition of propellant within cartridge case. Exercise extreme caution during unloading procedures. As barrel assembly is opened. Barrel-locking latch is held in the open position by spring-loaded latch lock. Handle accordingly. After the round has been removed (either by unloading and catching the round or by unloading close to the ground for a short fall).2. Feeding Chambering Locking Figure 8-5. Barrel-locking latch rotates until it engages barrel-locking lug. Manually remove expended cartridge case or live round from barrel.

General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2. In a combat situation. 8. place a round into the breech. operation. and employment of any weapon. If the primer has been dented (a hangfire).2. Ensure the extractor contacts the cartridge case rim.4.2. aim the M79. when consistently and properly used.2 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of readiness.2. Ensure the M79 is on safe. and safety features specific to the M79 grenade launcher. 4.2. 8.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M79 Grenade Launcher Weapon handling commands are issued by the supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. Move barrel-locking latch as far to the right as possible. place trigger finger straight along the receiver and place the weapon on safe. 8.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. will assist personnel with safely handling the M79 grenade launcher.4. 8. 8.2 5. 8. carry the round back to friendly lines so the enemy cannot use it. using common sense and staying within the safety parameters as much as the tactical situation permits. 5. like other Navy weapons. 8.3 Safe Handling Safety Considerations The warnings listed below in Figure 8-8. take the weapon off safe. 8-5 AUG 2003 .2. 6. 3.2 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE. will maximize safety during weapon handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon. the weapon should be cleared rapidly. keep the round separate from other ammunition until it can be properly disposed of.2. 2. In a tactical situation.3 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. Point muzzle of launcher at an area clear of personnel.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M79 Grenade Launcher The M79’s safety status is defined. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M79 are defined in Figure 8-6. when consistently applied.4.2. With the barrel assembly open. 8. will result in the safe and proficient handling of the weapon. The standardized procedures included in this section. and pull the trigger to engage the target. by four weapon condition codes.NTRP 3-07.2. unloading. The commands set forth in Figure 8-7. 1. Close breech.4 Safe Handling Procedures for the M79 Grenade Launcher on the Range The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 8-7 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. when followed. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M79 from Condition 4 to Condition 1.

2. Grasp and remove the partially extracted cartridge case.5 Procedures to UNLOAD. Ensure the M79 is on safe. Figure 8-7. 4.4. Not applicable. M79 Grenade Launcher Weapon Condition Codes COMMAND Load Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. 8. Have another person inspect the M79 to ensure no ammunition is present.2 CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Round inserted. Grasp and remove partially extracted cartridge case.4 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD. 1. SHOW CLEAR.2. barrel latched down. Ensure the M79 is on safe. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M79 from any condition to Condition 4: 1.2. M79 Grenade Launcher Weapon Handling Commands 8. 3. Figure 8-6. safety is on. Take the weapon from Condition 1 to Condition 4. 4. Requires a second person to check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present in the weapon before it is placed in Condition 4. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M79 from Condition 1 to Condition 4. Engage the target. Move barrel-locking latch as far right as possible. Stop target engagement.NTRP 3-07. Not applicable. barrel latched down. 2. 3. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. Move barrel-locking latch as far right as possible. There is no Condition 2 for the M79. There is no Condition 3 for the M79. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD.4. AUG 2003 8-6 . Weapon is free of ammunition.2. safety is on. Close breech.

or firing grenade launcher. After receiving acknowledgment that the M79 is clear. Do not carry weapon in open position. 8. Be in a protected position when firing the grenades at targets within 130 meters (427 ft).1.1 Weapon Transfer From One Person to Another Proper weapon handling is required every time a person passes a weapon to another person or receives a weapon from another person. Note Danger radius of the practice grenade is 20 meters (66 ft). 2. 8. 8-7 AUG 2003 . personnel. Be sure safety is in safe position after loading grenade launcher. This everyday occurrence must take place with the same safety considerations expected on a live fire range. place the weapon in Condition 4. Do not engage targets within 130-meter (427-ft) radius of unprotected friendly troops. Close breech. perform the following procedures. 6.2 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS AND WARNINGS Do not point muzzle in direction of personnel when loading. Do not interchange barrel assemblies or components from one weapon to another. Figure 8-8. Do not fire canopy smoke cartridges so that a falling ignited projectile could descend upon friendly troops. To properly pass a weapon between personnel. personnel. zeroing. causing injury to personnel and/or damage to material. Projectiles assembled with M552 (T333) fuzes will arm within 3 meters (10 ft) of weapon.1 Personnel Transferring the Weapon The person handing off the weapon shall: 1. Use only authorized rounds. will promote the safe handling of the M79 between personnel and during movement with the weapon. clearing.NTRP 3-07.3 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SAFE WEAPON MOVEMENT PROCEDURES This section provides specific instructions that. Doing so can result in injury to. when consistently applied. Clear line of fire of all obstructions that will endanger personnel when weapon is fired.3. or death of.3. Weapon must be carried in a closed and locked position with safety on. Safe Handling Warnings for the M79 Grenade Launcher 5. Open breech of the M79 and visually inspect the chamber to ensure no ammunition is present. Ensure the M79 is on safe. Do not squeeze trigger and remove safety at the same time. 8. Such action will result in injury to. Do not use or fire cartridges other than those authorized for the M79 grenade launcher.2. or death of.

2. unless the situation dictates otherwise.2 8.1 M79 Grenade Launcher Transports The transports. Angle the barrel of the launcher upward about 45 degrees in the general direction of the enemy.3. 8.3. The weapon is slung over the strong shoulder with the muzzle pointed up. and the ready carry.2 M79 Grenade Launcher Carries Weapon carries are designed to place personnel in a state of increased readiness as the threat level increases.2. It permits control of the launcher while moving and still allows quick engagement of the enemy.NTRP 3-07.1 Tactical Carry The tactical carry is used when no immediate threat is present. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. are used when no immediate threat is present and are especially useful when moving for long periods. the alert carry. 8.1. staying prepared to engage a threat.3. Visually inspect the chamber on the M79 to ensure there is no ammunition present. 8.2.2 Personnel Receiving the Weapon The person receiving the weapon shall: 1. Ensure that the M79 is on safe. Place the stock of the launcher along the side of the body at approximately hip level. To perform the tactical carry: 1.2 Safe Movement (Transports/Carries) for the M79 Grenade Launcher Specific instruction governing movement of the M79 will ensure personnel move safely with the weapon while. This transport is mainly used during periods of inclement weather to keep moisture out of the bore of the launcher.3 Cross Body Sling Arms (Muzzle Up or Down) This transport may be used when both hands are required for work. if necessary. The weapon is slung across the back with the muzzle up or down. The three weapon carries for the M79 are the tactical carry.2.1.1 Strong Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Up) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely.3. AUG 2003 8-8 . 8. They are also used whenever both hands are needed for other work. Normally. 2.1.2.3. 8.3. in which the launcher is slung over the back or shoulder. The weapon is slung over the weak shoulder with the muzzle pointed down. All three carries permit quick engagement when necessary. 8.2.2. Close breech.2. Place the nonfiring hand on the fore-end.3. 2. 3.1. 3. concurrently. 8.3.2 Weak Side Sling Arms (Muzzle Down) This transport may be used when no immediate threat is present and enemy contact is unlikely. the firing hand around the pistol grip. The procedures for transporting and carrying the M79 follow. There are three weapons transports. the weapon is slung with the muzzle down to prevent pointing the muzzle in an unsafe direction.

target). place leaf sight down. estimate the distance to the target. establish the firing position. At the same time.3. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of the launcher from the shoulder. place the leaf sight in the down position.2.3. These procedures assume the M79 is in Condition 4. For targets between 50 and 80 meters. Place the stock of the launcher in the shoulder. 7. with the muzzle pointed in the direction of enemy contact. Place the nonfiring hand on the fore-end.2 Alert Carry The alert carry is used when enemy contact is probable. It allows immediate target engagement. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 8.2 4. For targets between 80 and 365 meters. 2.3. To perform the alert carry: 1. When the strong arm is free of the sling and the launcher clears all personal gear. Take the M79 off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. and aim head high on the target. For targets within 50 meters. pull the launcher forward off the shoulder with the nonfiring hand. 3. Do not move the head down to meet the stock of the launcher. 8-9 AUG 2003 . 8. Roll the strong shoulder forward and release the sling from the firing hand once the fore-end has cleared the elbow.3.NTRP 3-07. 6.3.2. Position the muzzle slightly below eye level. and the trigger finger straight along the receiver. the muzzle moves (eyes.2. Engagement of the enemy is faster from the alert carry than from the tactical carry. pull down on the sling and raise the strong elbow out and parallel to the deck. 2. Continue pulling the launcher forward with the nonfiring hand while rotating the launcher parallel to the deck. and grasp the fore-end. Reach under the strong arm with the nonfiring hand between the sling and the body. the firing hand around the pistol grip. muzzle.2. Place the stock of the launcher in the shoulder. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver. 8. Level the launcher while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. Place the nonfiring hand on the fore-end.3 Ready Carry The ready carry is used when contact with the enemy is imminent. Load the M79 bringing it to Condition 1. Position the sight of the M79 as appropriate for the range to the target. Lower the launcher sights to just below eye level to maintain a clear field of view until a target is identified. with the muzzle angled down 45 degrees and pointed in the likely direction of the enemy. 8. Ensure wherever the eyes move.1 Presenting From Strong Side Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Up) 1.2. 5. 8. the firing hand around the pistol grip.3 Procedures to Present the M79 Grenade Launcher The procedures that follow provide two methods to efficiently take the M79 from a transport to a firing stance. 2. At the same time. use rear sight in the raised position. To perform the ready carry: 1. 4. While looking at the target.

use the rear sight in the raised position. Grasp fore-end with the nonfiring hand.2 8. 8. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Technical Manual. place leaf sight down.3. 9. 3. For targets within 50 meters. TM 9-1010-205-10. 6. 2. Position the sight of the M79 as appropriate for the range to the target. For targets between 50 and 80 meters. 5. lean forward slightly to facilitate removal of the launcher from the shoulder.2. 8.2 Presenting From Weak Wide Sling Arms Transport (Muzzle Down) 1.4 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M79 is issued from and returned to the armory. 7. Rotate the launcher counterclockwise while extending the muzzle toward the target (clockwise for left-handed shooters). AUG 2003 8-10 . For targets between 80 and 365 meters. refer to Operator’s Manual. Level the launcher while pulling it firmly into the pocket of the shoulder to obtain proper stock weld. estimate the distance to the target and aim head high on the target. While looking at the target. Load the M79 bringing it to Condition 1. 8. the index finger pointed toward the muzzle.5 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the M79 grenade launcher. TM 9-1010-205-10. Take the launcher off safe and place the trigger finger on the trigger. Establish firing position. 4.6 M79 GRENADE LAUNCHER SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on grenade launcher marksmanship. Establish a firing grip with the firing hand while keeping the trigger finger straight along the receiver.NTRP 3-07. Grasp the sling with the firing hand to prevent the launcher from falling off the shoulder. Continue extending the launcher toward the target to ensure the launcher clears all personal gear. Do not move the head down to meet the stock of the launcher.3. 8. place leaf sight in the down position.

9. the M60 (series) machine gun is capable of being fired from hand-held positions or from several types of mounts. link belt-fed. The M60 (series) machine gun fires from an open bolt position. and remedial actions.2. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Left Side 9-1 AUG 2003 .2 CHAPTER 9 M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun 9. major components. is an automatic. gas-operated weapon with fixed headspace.1 Description of the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun The M60 (series) machine gun.1.NTRP 3-07. air-cooled. cycle of operation. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. The Navy configuration of the M60E3 has both long and short barrels and a V-notch rear sight. Barrel and Bipod Assembly Rear Sight Assembly Cover Assembly Stock Assembly Forearm Assembly Pistol Grip Figure 9-1. A general-purpose weapon.1 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M60 (series) medium machine gun and information necessary to understand the M60’s technical characteristics. shown in Figures 9-1 and 9-2. The M60D is primarily used for support of ground operations and is an aircraft door-mounted or vehicle-mounted machine gun. The M60 and M60E3 are primarily used for ground operations.

4 Cycle of Operation for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation to ensure the M60 is readily available for action. as described in Figure 9-5. The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M60 are listed in Figure 9-8. the M60 and M60E3 have six model-specific major components in common. however.5 Remedial Actions for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun The M60 (series) medium machine gun is an effective and reliable weapon.2 M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M60 (Series) machine gun are listed in Figure 9-3. Therefore. Proper care and preventive maintenance will help ensure its serviceability.1.3 M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Major Components The M60. The M60D also has four model-specific major components.NTRP 3-07.1. and M60E3 have five common major components (or assemblies). 9.2. In addition to the common major components (or assemblies) described in Figure 9-4.1. Both malfunctions and stoppages are discussed in the next two sections. as described in Figure 9-6. M60D. 9. as described in Figure 9-4. that there is no one set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur. M60D. The differences between M60. It is important to understand.1. AUG 2003 9-2 . M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Right Side 9. 9. the appropriate remedial action will be based on the cause of the malfunction or stoppage.2 Carrying Handle Front Sight Cocking Handle Assembly Trigger Receiver Assembly Figure 9-2. and M60E3 model components are summarized in Figure 9-7.

609 ft (1.62mm NATO 550 rounds per minute 4 lands.000 rounds SW-361-AA-MMI-0/M60E3 TM 02705E-10/1 SAFETIES Safety lever Safety push button Safety lever Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition.725 m) 7.3 kg) 43.4 kg) 43.NTRP 3-07. right hand twist LOGISTICS In-Service Date Life Expectancy Technical Manual # Operator Manual # 1960 25.221 ft (3.2.4 in (1.100 m) 12.5 lb (8. Automatic Bandoleer 100 rounds 18.4 kg) 42. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Specifications. Corp. one turn in 12 inches.62mm NATO 550 rounds per minute 4 lands. one turn in 12 inches.000 rounds TM 9-1005-224-24P TM 9-1005-224-10 1966 25.5 in (1. right hand twist M60C 1005-00-909-3002 Saco Def. one turn in 12 inches.800 fps (853 m) 3.077 mm) 2. Automatic Bandoleer 100 rounds 23 lb (10.100 m) 12. Logistics.800 fps (853 m) 3. and Safeties (Sheet 1 of 2) 9-3 AUG 2003 .609 ft (1.000 rounds TM 9-1005-224-24P TM 9-1005-224-10 1985 25.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (empty) Overall Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range Caliber Cyclic Rate of Fire (automatic) Rifling MODEL M60 BASIC 1005-00-0605-7710 Saco Def.800 fps (853 m) 3.725 m) 7.105 mm) 2.62mm NATO 550 rounds per minute 4 lands.100 m) 12. Corp.725 m) 7. right hand twist M60E3 1005-01-08-6259 Saco Def. Figure 9-3. Corp. Ammunition.221 ft (3. Automatic Bandoleer 100 rounds 25 lb (11.5 in (1.609 ft (1.221 ft (3.105 mm) 2.

Figure 9-3. Blank M993. and chambering rounds.NTRP 3-07. Low-flash ball M82. Supports all major components. Provides a means to carry the machine gun with one hand. Tracer M63. feeding link belt. Ammunition. Houses cartridges for firing. Dummy M80. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Common Major Components AUG 2003 9-4 . Houses internal parts and controls operation of weapon through a series of cam ways. Provides a means to manually move bolt assembly to the rear. Logistics. The bipod assembly provides a semistable platform when the machine gun is fired from the prone position. and Safeties (Sheet 2 of 2) COMMON MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Cover Assembly Cocking Handle Assembly Barrel and Bipod Assembly Carrying Handle Assembly FUNCTION Positions and holds cartridge in place for stripping. Ball M80E1. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Specifications. Armor piercing 100-round bandoliers A111 (all M82) A127 (mix of 4 M80 and 1 M62) A131 (mix of 4 M80 and 1 M62) A143 (all M80) A159 (all M63) A255 (mix of 4 M80E1 and 1 M62) AA04 (mix of 4 M993 and 1 M62) AA35 (mix of 4 M993 and 1 M276) X X X X X X X X X M60C X X X X X X X X X M60E3 X X X X X X X X X Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition.2 MODEL AMMUNITION M60 BASIC Individual Rounds M62. Receiver Assembly Figure 9-4. The carrying handle assembly folds down when rear sight is used and the machine gun is fired.2.

9. Figure 9-6.1. uncontrolled fire (runaway gun). Notify unit maintenance of any burrs. M60D Medium Machine Gun Major Components 9. Provides a means to aim the machine gun at the target with accuracy. Guides cartridge for positioning and feeding. Provides handles to move machine gun and houses the machine gun trigger.5. inspect. Corrective action includes: 1. Used for support during assault firing and for transport.1 Sluggish Operation This is normally caused by excessive friction from dirt. Provides a handhold when firing from the hip or from a standing or kneeling position. 9-5 AUG 2003 .NTRP 3-07. Provides a means to aim the machine gun in the general area of the target.2 M60/M60E3 SPECIFIC MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Trigger Mechanism and Grip Assembly Shoulder Gun Stock Cartridge Feed Tray and Hanger Assembly Rear Sight Assembly Forearm Assembly Small Arms Sling FUNCTION Controls the firing of the machine gun. burrs.2. A malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. M60/M60E3 Medium Machine Gun Specific Major Components M60D MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Sear and Safety Housing Grip and Trigger Assembly Cartridge Tray Assembly Rear Sight Assembly FUNCTION Controls the firing of the machine gun.1. 2. and lubricate the weapon. carbon. The sight adjusts horizontally as well as vertically. Three of the most common malfunctions of the M60 (series) are sluggish operation.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the M60 (series) to function satisfactorily or to perform as designed. or lack of lubrication. Figure 9-5. and cook-offs. The rear sight is nonadjustable.5.1. Provides a suitable surface to stabilize the weapon against the shoulder while firing the machine gun from any position except from the hip. The hanger assembly supports the bandoleer. Guides cartridges for positioning and feeding. Clean.

hold the weapon on target and fire the remaining ammunition. After 15 minutes. Common causes include a worn sear. clear the weapon and check to find the cause of the malfunction. For example. In the field. clear the machine gun. rotate cover latch. The following are the actions taken for uncontrolled fire: 1. If there are 20 rounds or less on the belt. A hot gun typically occurs after 200 rounds have been fired within 2 minutes. 4. when there is a hot. hold the weapon on target and fire the remaining ammunition. On the range. pull cocking handle all the way back and hold.NTRP 3-07. 2. If nothing is ejected from a hot gun. do not open the cover. 3. 4. Let the weapon cool for 15 minutes before further firing occurs.1. break the ammunition belt by twisting it quickly in either direction.1.5 Cook-offs A cook-off is the firing of a round by the heat of a very hot barrel and not by the firing system. and open cover. worn operating rod sear notch. When the weapon stops firing. 9. When weapon stops firing. However.1. broken sear plunger. 9. If there are 20 rounds or more on the belt.2 Uncontrolled Fire (Runaway Gun) (M60) Uncontrolled fire occurs when the weapon continues to fire after the trigger is released. Instead. Common causes include a worn sear. If there are 20 rounds or more on the belt. Remain away from the machine gun for 15 minutes. put it on safe. and broken or missing sear spring. a cook-off can occur within 50 rounds. place weapon on safe and keep it pointed downrange. the ambient temperature in different regions will make a difference in the time required to reach a hot gun state. AUG 2003 9-6 .5. Never reload a runaway gun until it has been repaired.1. 5. Clear the weapon and check to find the cause of the malfunction. Place the weapon on safe and remove link belt. sunny day and both the weapon and ammunition are in the sun.2. broken sear plunger. An open-cover cook-off could result in injury or death. return weapon to armory for inspection and repair.1.3 Uncontrolled Fire (Runaway Gun) (M60D) Uncontrolled fire occurs when the weapon continues to fire after the trigger is released.5.5. break the ammunition belt by twisting it quickly in either direction.1. The following are the actions taken for uncontrolled fire: 1. and broken or missing sear spring. 2.2 9. If there are 20 rounds or less on the belt. 3. worn operating rod sear notch.

Differences between M60.5. Note Many stoppages can be prevented by properly caring for the M60.1. prepared personnel must quickly identify and remedy problems to get the machine gun back into action. General remedial action steps are as follows: 1. 9-7 AUG 2003 .2. Proper care includes keeping the weapon clean and well-lubricated.2 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS ASSEMBLY/COMPONENT Forward Grip Assembly Tray and Hanger Assembly Cartridge Feed Tray and Hanger Assembly Cartridge Tray Assembly Dust and Moisture Seal Boot Forearm Assembly Grip and Trigger Assembly Gun Adapter Magazine Hanger Assembly Rear Sight (adjustable) Rear Sight (nonadjustable) Sear and Safety Housing Assembly Sear Assembly Link and Spring Shoulder Gun Stock Small Arms Sling Trigger Mechanism Grip Assembly Quick Release Pin X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X M60 M60D M60E3 X X X Figure 9-7.2 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. M60D.3 General Remedial Action Remedial action includes attempting to determine the cause of the malfunction or stoppage. Wait 10 seconds for a possible hangfire.5. Stoppages are normally discovered when the machine gun will not fire. When a stoppage does occur. 9.NTRP 3-07.1. and M60E3 Medium Machine Gun Model Components 9.

Rearward movement of operating rod yoke acts against bolt camming slot. which forces the projectile out of the barrel. 6. and raise feed tray. reapply remedial action as necessary. AUG 2003 9-8 . unload and clear it. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. If a cartridge case. Inspect receiver.2. then inspect the ammunition and weapon to determine the cause of stoppage. ejector. when the cover is first opened to unload or clear the gun. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Cycle of Operation 2. As a safety precaution. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor. sweep the gun with the hand to ensure the gun is clear of brass and links. reload and attempt to fire. If the weapon still does not fire. If a round is not ejected. belt link.2 STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Placement of a round in the path of the bolt. Open cover. or round is ejected. Expulsion of the cartridge case by the ejector and spring. Lock bolt to the rear.NTRP 3-07. 8. chamber. For the M60 only. and attempt to fire. 7. take aim on target. If the weapon still fails to fire. and ammunition. Return cocking handle to forward locked position. Figure 9-8. place safety on safe (M60) or press in on safety (M60D). and attempt to fire. If a round is in chamber. 3. 5. Movement and rotation unlocks the bolt from the barrel socket. while keeping head in downward position. close cover. locking the bolt with the barrel socket. the gunner (the person directly behind the chamber) should always keep head downward. and then. Pushing of the round into the chamber by the bolt. Inspect the weapon and ammunition. 4. check ejection port to see if cartridge case. causing the bolt to rotate counterclockwise 90 degrees. rotating the bolt 90 degrees clockwise. return the cocking handle to its forward position. If there is no round in the chamber. or round has been ejected. Compression of firing pin spring. Forward movement of the bolt causes locking lugs to contact bolt camming surfaces inside barrel. lower feed tray. Pull cocking handle rearward (M60). Unzip ejection control bag and pull cocking handle rearward (M60D). belt link. remove ammunition link belt.

Figure 9-9. 9. Feed tray clear. Cease engagement of the target. Ammunition on feed tray. Not applicable.2. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun The safety status of the M60 (series) is defined. 9. readiness. and cover closed. With a second individual. The commands set forth in Figure 9-10. bolt locked to the rear. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1. when consistently and properly used. Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. and employment of any weapon. like other Navy weapons. CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Ammunition on feed tray. when consistently applied. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M60 (series) are defined in Figure 9-9. The standardized procedures included in this section. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M60 (series). bolt forward on empty chamber. by one of four weapon condition codes. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes COMMAND Load Make Ready Condition One Load Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands 9-9 AUG 2003 . Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2. bolt forward on empty chamber. and operation specific to the M60 (series) medium machine gun.2 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of safety. unloading. will maximize safety during weapon handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon.NTRP 3-07. and cover closed.2.2 9. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. Figure 9-10. weapon on safe. Engage the target. weapon on fire.2. weapon on fire. and cover closed.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading.

Check the sight setting. 2. Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects.2. Place the weapon on safe (if the situation allows). with the open side of the link down. The gunner ensures that the bolt is forward.3. 3. Ensure the weapon is on fire.2 9. excess oil. 2. The gunner then closes the feed tray cover. 9. The assistant gunner either places the bandoleer on the bandoleer hanger for the M60/M60E3 or attaches the ammunition chute to the magazine bracket for the M60D. and the feed tray cover remains closed. the weapon is on fire. check the weapon for dirt. 9. grasp the cocking lever palm up.3 Procedures to CONDITION ONE LOAD On the command CONDITION ONE LOAD. The assistant gunner then places the first round directly over the feed aperture of the feed tray.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. 9. Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4. The gunner raises the feed tray cover. 5. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the machine gun from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1. The assistant gunner then ensures that the open end of the link is down and forces the first round into the feedway until a distinct click is heard. and lock the bolt to the rear. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4.3.3 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M60 (Series) Medium Machine Gun on the Range The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 9-10 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs.2. 4. AUG 2003 9-10 . 3. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. The assistant gunner either places the bandoleer on the bandoleer hanger for the M60/M60E3 or attaches the ammunition chute to the magazine bracket for the M60D.2.2. 4. 3. 2. and grease.NTRP 3-07. The click indicates that the first round has passed to the right and the holding pawls have engaged it.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY.2.3. Note Before loading the M60 (series). personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. Manually return the cocking lever forward. The gunner locks the bolt to the rear and places the weapon on safe.

9-11 AUG 2003 . The gunner raises the feed tray cover. The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray. 9. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. 2.2.7. personnel shall take the weapon off safe and pull the trigger to engage the target. 4. and rides the bolt all the way forward. The gunner closes the feed tray cover once the chamber and receiver are clear. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M60 (series) from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. 9. The gunner points the weapon downrange. 9. and locks the bolt to the rear.2 9. 8. 3. The gunner raises the feed tray cover. 9. The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray.7 Procedures to UNLOAD. 7. The gunner places the weapon on fire.6 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD.1 From Condition 1 1. The cocking handle is then pushed forward and the weapon is placed on safe. and locks the bolt to the rear. The cocking handle is then pushed forward and the weapon is placed on safe.4 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE. and rides the bolt all the way forward.2. The gunner closes the feed tray cover once the chamber and receiver are clear.2. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M60 (series) from any condition to Condition 4: 1. holds the cocking handle to the rear. personnel shall place the trigger finger straight along the trigger guard and place the weapon on safe. The assistant gunner performs a secondary check to ensure that no ammunition is present in the feed tray or chamber.2. The gunner places the weapon on fire.3. 2. pulls the cocking handle to the rear (palm up).5 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. squeezes the trigger. The gunner points the weapon downrange.3. SHOW CLEAR. 7. The gunner ensures the weapon is on fire.NTRP 3-07.3.2.3. squeezes the trigger. pulls the cocking handle to the rear (palm up). The gunner raises the feed tray and inspects the chamber to ensure that all ammunition has been ejected. 6. 4. 5.3. 3. holds the cocking handle to the rear.2. The gunner ensures the weapon is on fire. The gunner raises the feed tray and inspects the chamber to ensure that all ammunition has been ejected. 6. 5.

The gunner squeezes trigger to release bolt and slowly rides bolt all the way forward. The gunner closes feed tray cover. The gunner pulls cocking handle to the rear. TM 9-1005-224-10.7.3 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M60 (series) is issued from and returned to the armory. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operator’s Manual. 7. 9.4 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the M60 machine gun. locking the bolt to the rear. 6.2 From Condition 3 1.5 M60 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on machine gun marksmanship. TM 9-1005-224-10. The gunner pulls cocking handle to the rear and places the weapon on fire. 4. The gunner points the weapon downrange. and pushes the cocking handle forward until it clicks. The assistant gunner removes ammunition and links from the feed tray.NTRP 3-07. The gunner then places the weapon on safe.2 9. 8. AUG 2003 9-12 . 5. The gunner inspects chamber to ensure no rounds or links remain. 9. 3.3. 2. 9. refer to Operator’s Manual.2. The assistant gunner performs secondary check to ensure that no ammunition is present in the feed tray or chamber. The gunner raises feed tray cover.2.

major components. The M240 (series) is capable of being fired from handheld positions or from several types of mounts. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Left Side 10-1 AUG 2003 .1 Description of the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun The M240 (series) medium machine gun. shown in Figures 10-1 and 10-2. link belt-fed.1 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M240 (series) medium machine gun and information necessary to understand the M240’s technical characteristics. Barrel Assembly Buffer Assembly Butt Stock Compensator Trigger Housing Assembly Pistol Grip Figure 10-1.2 CHAPTER 10 M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun 10. gas-operated weapon that fires from an open bolt position. The M240N model is designed with front and rear sights and is configured for mounting on watercraft. 10.NTRP 3-07. The information presented in this chapter is common to all models except where noted. is an automatic. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. The M240B/M240G models are designed as tripod-mounted or bipod-supported machine guns for use by ground forces. cycle of operation. and remedial actions.1. air-cooled.2.

Figure 10-5 summarizes the specific differences by model. The eight steps in the cycle of operation of the M240 (series) are listed in Figure 10-6.2 M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M240 (series) machine gun are listed in Figure 10-3.NTRP 3-07.1. 10.4 Cycle of Operation for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation to ensure the M240 (series) is readily available for action. as described in Figure 10-4.1. barrel.1.3 M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Major Components The M240 (series) medium machine gun has eight major common components. Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition. AUG 2003 10-2 . M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Right Side 10. 10. and buttstock and buffer assemblies differ between M240 models.2 Rear Sight Cover Assembly Carrying Handle Front Sight Safety Cocking Handle Assembly Receiver Assembly Bipod Assembly Figure 10-2. The specifications listed are for the M240 machine gun and apply to all models except where noted.2. Receiver.

7 in (627 mm) 2.221 ft (3.050 rounds/min 2.725 m) 7.800 fps (853 mps) M240G 1005-01-3510-2714 FN Manufacturing Gas operated.7 kg) 48 in (1.050 rounds/min N/A 2.1 lb (12.9 kg) 48 in (1.725 m) 7. Ammunition.625 ft (800 m) 5.1 lb (10.8 lb (11.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range: Point Target Area Target (with mount) Maximum Range Caliber Cyclic Rate of Fire (automatic) Cyclic Rate of Fire with Hydraulic Buffer MODEL M240B 1005-01-412-31210 FN Manufacturing Gas operated. automatic M13 disintegrating link belt 100-round linked belt 27.800 fps (853 mps) M240N 1005-01-4103-1660 FN Manufacturing Gas operated.62 x 51mm NATO 650 to 1.219 mm) 24.625 ft (800 m) N/A 12.221 ft (3.3 kg) 48 in (1.000 rounds TM 10-1005-313 23&P TM 10-1005-313-10 1995 30.800 fps (853 mps) 2.625 ft (800 m) 5. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Specifications.221 ft (3.7 in (627 mm) 2.2. and Safeties 10-3 AUG 2003 .7 in (627 mm) 2.NTRP 3-07.62 x 51mm NATO 650 to 1.725 m) 7.050 rounds/min N/A LOGISTICS In-Service Date Life Expectancy Technical Manual # Operator Manual # 1997 30.000 rounds TM 10-1005-313 23&P TM 10-1005-313-10 2002 30.800 m) 12. Logistics.800 m) 12.906 ft (1.219 mm) 24. automatic M13 disintegrating link belt 100-round linked belt 24.050 rounds/min 650 to 1.62 x 51mm NATO 650 to 1.906 ft (1. automatic M13 disintegrating link belt 100-round linked belt 25.219 mm) 24.000 rounds TM 10-1005-313 23&P TM 10-1005-313-10 AMMUNITION Linked 100-round belts A131 (4 M80 ball and 1 M62 tracer) A143 (M80 ball) A145 (M63 dummy) M82 blank X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Figure 10-3.

2. extraction. Absorbs recoil of bolt and operating rod assembly at end of recoil movement. Figure 10-4. and chambering.NTRP 3-07. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Common Major Components DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS ASSEMBLY AND PART NUMBER Receiver Assembly (121076834) Receiver Assembly (1210107566) Receiver Assembly (121010101710) Barrel Assembly (121076817) Barrel Assembly (121076818) Buttstock and Buffer Assembly (121076851) Buttstock and Buffer Assembly (1210881086) X X X X X X M240B X X X M240G M240N Figure 10-5.2 COMMON MAJOR COMPONENTS Barrel Assembly Buffer Assembly Driving Spring Rod Assembly Bolt and Operating Rod Assembly Trigger Housing Assembly Cover Assembly Feed Tray Receiver Assembly Houses round for firing and directs projectile. Feeds linked belt and holds rounds in position for stripping. Controls feeding. Serves as a support for all major components. The cover assembly has an optical rail sight. Controls the firing of the machine gun. and ejection of rounds using the projectile propelling gas for power. feeding. Serves as a guide for positioning rounds to assist in chambering. Provides energy for returning bolt and operating rod assembly to firing position. firing. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Differences Between Models AUG 2003 10-4 . Houses action of weapon and controls functioning of the weapon through a series of cam ways. chambering. stripping.

inspect.5 Remedial Actions for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun The M240 (series) medium machine gun is an effective and reliable weapon.2. however.5. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Cycle of Operation 10. It is important to understand.5. that there is no one set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur. break the ammunition belt by twisting it quickly in either direction. broken sear plunger. If there are 20 rounds or less on the belt. Therefore. uncontrolled fire (runaway gun) and cook-offs. Expulsion of the cartridge case by the ejector.NTRP 3-07. Figure 10-6. Check the gas setting on the gas regulator located on the barrel. 2. A malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. and lubricate the weapon. and broken or missing sear spring. 10-5 AUG 2003 . 10.2 STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Placement of a round in the path of the bolt. Forward movement of the driving spring rod assembly returns the bolt and operating rod to assembly firing position.1.1. 1. 2. worn operating rod sear notch.1. Both malfunctions and stoppages are discussed in the next two sections. Proper care and preventive maintenance will help ensure its serviceability.5. Pushing of the round into the chamber by the bolt. If there are 20 rounds or more on the belt.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the M240 (series) to function satisfactorily or to perform as designed. the appropriate remedial action will be based on the cause of the malfunction or stoppage. Common causes include a worn sear.1. hold the weapon on target and fire the remaining ammunition. Clean. 10. Three of the most common malfunctions of the M240 (series) are sluggish operation.1. Compression of the driving spring rod assembly. The following are the actions taken for uncontrolled fire: 1.2 Uncontrolled Fire (Runaway Gun) Uncontrolled fire occurs when the weapon continues to fire after the trigger is released. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor.1. Rearward movement of the bolt and operating rod assembly provides extraction and ejection using the projectile propelling gas for power.1 Sluggish Operation This is normally caused by excessive friction or excessive loss of gas. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. which forces the projectile out of the barrel. 10.

Ensure the weapon is on safe and remove link belt. 10.1. For example. 10. 10.2.5. After 15 minutes. the ambient temperature in different regions will make a difference in the time required to reach a hot gun state. When a stoppage does occur. An open-cover cook-off could result in injury or death. belt link. locking bolt to the rear. 4. Wait 10 seconds for a possible hangfire.1. Never reload a runaway gun until it has been repaired.2 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage. do not open the cover. a cook-off can occur within 50 rounds.3 Cook-offs A cook-off is the firing of a round by the heat of a very hot barrel and not by the firing system. pull cocking handle all the way back and hold. If nothing is ejected from a hot gun. Remain away from the machine gun for 15 minutes.NTRP 3-07. place weapon on safe and keep it pointed downrange. when there is a hot. or round has been ejected. Pull cocking handle rearward. Note Many stoppages can be prevented by properly caring for the M240.2 3.1. However. AUG 2003 10-6 . clear machine gun.1. Proper care includes keeping the weapon clean and well-lubricated.5. 3. Clear the weapon and check to find the cause of the malfunction. When the weapon stops firing. 2. Let the weapon cool for 15 minutes before further firing occurs. Check ejection port to see if a cartridge case. Stoppages are normally discovered when the machine gun will not fire. Instead. prepared personnel must quickly identify and remedy problems to get the machine gun back into action.5. A hot gun typically occurs after 200 rounds have been fired within 2 minutes.3 General Remedial Action Remedial action includes attempting to determine the cause of the malfunction or stoppage. sunny day and both the weapon and ammunition are in the sun. Return cocking handle to forward locked position. General remedial action steps are as follows: 1.

2. and raise feed tray. and then inspect the ammunition and the weapon to determine the cause of the stoppage. ejector.2. 6. chamber. take aim on target. reload and attempt to fire.NTRP 3-07. by one of four weapon condition codes. 10.2 4. 5. If nothing is ejected and the gun is hot (150 rounds fired within a 2-minute period). Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects. The commands set forth in Figure 10-8. If a cartridge case. and conditions of readiness specific to the M240 (series) machine gun. when consistently and properly used. 10. belt link. If it does not fire. If the weapon still fails to fire. do not open the cover. If the weapon fires. and ammunition. The standardized procedures included in this section. and remain away from machine gun for 15 minutes.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. return the cocking handle to its forward position. operation. Place safety to safe.2. continue to fire. lower feed tray and close cover and attempt to fire. like other Navy weapons. reapply remedial action as necessary. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M240. unloading. If a round is not ejected. 7. Open cover. 10.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun The safety status of the M240 (series) is defined. excess oil. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M240 (series) are listed in Figure 10-7. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2. will maximize safety during weapons handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon.2. If there is no round in the chamber. and attempt to fire.2 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the safety features. or round is ejected. check the weapon for dirt. and grease. If a round is in the chamber. After 15 minutes. Inspect the weapon and ammunition. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. 8. when consistently applied. place safety to safe or press in on safety. 10-7 AUG 2003 . clear the weapon.3 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun on the Range The weapon handling commands defined in Figure 10-8 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs: Note Before loading the M240. 10. remove ammunition link belt. keep machine gun pointed downrange. Inspect receiver. unload and clear it. and employment of any weapon.

Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4.2. Return cocking handle to forward position. Make sure round does not move away from cartridge stop during closing and latching of cover. 8. Ensure the weapon is on fire. Place weapon on safe.NTRP 3-07. Place link belt in feed tray.3. Check sight setting. 5. AUG 2003 10-8 . personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1. Check chamber. Close cover assembly. 11. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the machine gun from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1. Pull cocking handle assembly to rear. squeeze trigger ride bolt forward to close. Hold cocking handle to rear. Place weapon on safe (if situation permits). Place weapon on fire. 10.2 10. with first round against cartridge stop. 10. 3. 3. and pull cocking handle to the rear. and lock. Push in on latches to open cover assembly.2. Return cocking handle to forward position. 6.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. Raise feed tray. 9. 2. 4.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD.2. 2. Make sure it locks shut. 7. Lower feed tray.3.

weapon on fire. 5. bolt locked to the rear. Engage the target. 7. 6. 4. squeeze trigger ride bolt forward to close. Figure 10-7. bolt forward on empty chamber. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes COMMAND Load Make Ready Condition One Load Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4. and lock. Return cocking handle to forward position. 9.2. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. Raise feed tray. Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1.2 CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Ammunition on feed tray. Hold cocking handle to rear. Cease engagement of the target.3. bolt forward on empty chamber. Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. Place weapon on fire. Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. With a second individual. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 1: 1. Push in on latches to open cover assembly.3 Procedures to CONDITION ONE LOAD On the command CONDITION ONE LOAD. Ammunition on feed tray. M240 (Series) Medium Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands 10. 10-9 AUG 2003 . 2. Lower feed tray.2. Feed tray clear. Figure 10-8. Place weapon on safe. Pull cocking handle assembly to rear. weapon on fire. 8. Check chamber. Not applicable. 3. weapon on safe.NTRP 3-07.

2. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD.3.7 Procedures to UNLOAD. Place weapon on safe (if situation permits).3. 3. 4. The cocking handle is then pushed forward and the weapon placed on safe.3.2.NTRP 3-07. The gunner raises the feed tray and inspects the chamber to ensure that all ammunition has been ejected.6 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD.2. Place link belt in feed tray. SHOW CLEAR. with first round against cartridge stop.5 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. 5. The gunner points the weapon downrange. 10. the gunner closes the feed tray cover. The gunner raises the feed tray cover. pulls the cocking handle to the rear (palm up). 6. Check sight setting. Once the chamber and receiver are clear. The gunner places the weapon on fire. The gunner ensures the weapon is on fire.2 10. personnel shall place the trigger finger straight along the trigger guard and place the weapon on safe.2. 10. Return cocking handle to forward position. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: AUG 2003 10-10 .3. The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray. 11.2.2. squeezes the trigger. personnel shall take the weapon off safe and pull the trigger to engage the target. Ensure the weapon is on fire. and pull cocking handle to the rear. 10.4 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE. 14. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the weapon from any condition to Condition 4: 1. 10. 7. Make sure round does not move away from cartridge stop during closing and latching of cover. holds the cocking handle to the rear. and rides the bolt all the way forward. 13. and locks the bolt to the rear. 12. Close cover assembly. Make sure it locks shut.

The gunner pulls the cocking handle to the rear and places the weapon on fire. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operator’s Manual. 6.2. 8. 3. holds the cocking handle to the rear. 5. The gunner closes the feed tray cover. 4. The gunner squeezes trigger with the firing hand to release bolt and slowly rides bolt all the way forward. and locks the bolt to the rear. refer to Operator’s Manual. The gunner ensures the weapon is on fire. 8. pulls the cocking handle to the rear (palm up). The gunner raises the feed tray and inspects the chamber to ensure that all ammunition has been ejected. 4. 10-11 AUG 2003 .3. The gunner then places the weapon on safe. The assistant gunner performs a secondary check to ensure that no ammunition is present in feed tray or chamber. 6.7. 10. 2. The cocking handle is then pushed forward and the weapon is placed on safe. 2. TM 10-1005-313-23&P.NTRP 3-07.2.3 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M240 (series) machine gun is issued from and returned to the armory. 7. The gunner places the weapon on fire. The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray.2 From Condition 3 1. The gunner points the weapon downrange. 5. The gunner closes the feed tray cover once the chamber and receiver are clear. 7. The assistant gunner performs secondary check to ensure that no ammunition is present in feed tray or chamber. 10.1 From Condition 1 1.4 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the M240 (series) machine gun. The gunner raises the feed tray cover. The gunner pulls the cocking handle to the rear. 10.2 10.5 M240 (SERIES) MEDIUM MACHINE GUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on machine gun marksmanship. The gunner points the weapon downrange. The gunner inspects the chamber to ensure no rounds or links remain. The gunner raises the feed tray cover. The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray. TM 10-1005-313-23&P. and rides the bolt all the way forward. squeezes the trigger. locking the bolt to the rear. 3. and pushes the cocking handle forward until it clicks.3.2.7. 10.

2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 10-12 .2.NTRP 3-07.

1. major components.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Left Side 11-1 AUG 2003 . is an automatic. light armored vehicles. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. This weapon is used as a ground gun on the M3 tripod mount.50 caliber heavy barrel machine gun and information necessary to understand the M2’s technical characteristics. and remedial actions. disintegrating metallic link belt-fed. It fires from a closed bolt position and is capable of right. rates of fire. cycle of operation. slow flying aircraft.1 M2 .or left-hand feed. air-cooled. crew-served machine gun with adjustable head space.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the M2 . flexible machine gun.50 caliber heavy barrel. This weapon can be used effectively against personnel.2 CHAPTER 11 M2 . M2 . The M2 is used to provide automatic weapon suppression fire for offensive and defensive purposes.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun The M2 .1 Description of the M2 . 11. and low.2. shown in Figures 11-1 and 11-2. recoiloperated.NTRP 3-07. Cover Group Backplate Group Buffer Tube Sleeve Barrel Group Receiver Group Figure 11-1.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun 11.

The mount steadies the weapon.2 Front and Rear Sights Trigger Retracting Slide Handle M3 Tripod Mount Figure 11-2.3 M2 . which improves accuracy and control of fire.1. Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition.2. AUG 2003 11-2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Major Components The M2 has eight major components.1. The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the M2 are listed in Figure 11-5.5 Cycle of Operation for the M2 .50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Associated Components The M3 tripod mount is a lightweight.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Right Side 11. as described in Figure 11-4.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun It is important to understand the routine cycle of operation to ensure the M2 is readily available for action.1.2 M2 .NTRP 3-07.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the M2 are listed in Figure 11-3.4 M2 . M2 . portable folding mount. 11.1. 11. 11.

Logistics.6 Rates of Fire for the M2 . fired in bursts of six to nine rounds.050 fps (930 mps) 6.000 rounds SW361-AB-MMM-010 SW361-AB-MMO-010 SAFETIES Figure 11-3. recoil operated Disintegrating link belt 84 lb (38 kg) 65.1. the M2 is used to engage a target with well-aimed shots.2. at 10. Automatic.767 m) 0. The M2 is extremely accurate and can effectively engage targets out to 2.6. and Safeties 11. as listed below.200 ft (6. M10. Ammunition.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Specifications.to 10-second intervals.000 yards. and M17) Blank (M1A1) Dummy (M2) LOGISTICS 1968 50.2 Slow Fire In automatic mode. fired in bursts of six to nine rounds at 5. right hand twist None In-service date Life expectancy Technical manual # Operator manual # AMMUNITION Armor-piercing (M2) Armor-piercing-incendiary (M8 and MK 211) Armor-piercing-incendiary-tracer (M20) Ball (M2 and M33) Incendiary (M1 and M23) Tracer (M1.NTRP 3-07. 1 turn in 15 inches. slow fire is less than 40 rounds per minute.13 in (1.1. 11.50 450–600 rounds/min 8 lands. 11-3 AUG 2003 .2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Weight (empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Maximum Range Caliber Cyclic Rate of Fire Rifling M2HB Flexible 1005-00-322-9715 w/e 1005-00-726-5636 Saco Inc.654 mm) 45 in (1.000 ft (1.to 15-second intervals.6. 11.3 Rapid Fire In automatic mode. M2 .1.6. 11.829 m) 22. rapid fire is greater than 40 rounds per minute.1.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun The M2 has four rates of fire.143 mm) 3.1 Single Shot In the single-shot mode.

Secures the barrel to the recoiling parts. M2 . Figure 11-5. Drives the bolt forward when the bolt latch release is depressed. Bolt is unlocked from the barrel and barrel extension. Houses the trigger.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Major Components STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Positioning of round in feed tray groove ready for chambering.2. Ignition of the propellant within cartridge case. Firing pin is withdrawn into cocked position. using the propellant gases and recoil spring for power.2 MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Barrel Group Backplate Group Driving Spring Rod Assembly Bolt Group Barrel Buffer Body Barrel Extension Group Cover Group Receiver Group FUNCTION Houses cartridges for firing and directs the projectile. Provides feeding. feeding. which controls functioning of the weapon. which forces the projectile out of the barrel.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Cycle of Operation AUG 2003 11-4 .and righthand spade grips. buffer tube sleeve. Assists in recoil and counter-recoil of the bolt group. and extracting.NTRP 3-07. positions and holds cartridges in position for extracting. Bolt is locked to barrel and barrel extension. M2 . and chambering. chambering. firing. Pushing of the round into chamber by the bolt. and case is thrown out of the ejection port. and the left. bolt latch release. houses the action of the weapon. Figure 11-4. Expulsion of cartridge case strikes the ejector. Feeds linked belt ammunition. Serves as a support for all major components. Withdrawal of the cartridge case from the chamber by the extractor claw.

Proper care and preventive maintenance will help ensure its serviceability. 11.NTRP 3-07. 11. Check for corroded or damaged ammunition.1. 11-5 AUG 2003 . 2.2 11.3 Sluggish Operation 1. Check for dirt.7. Notify unit maintenance.1. Adjust headspace.1.7 Remedial Actions for the M2 . A malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation. Remove defective ammunition. that there is no one set of procedures that can be performed to clear all or even most of the stoppages that can occur. carbon. and lack of lubrication.1.1. sear slide. check headspace.2. weak or broken springs.1. Check driving spring rod assembly for crack(s). 5.1 Bolt Will Not Lock 1.1 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the M2 to function satisfactorily or to perform as designed. Weapon will not be easily pulled to the rear if set up incorrectly (left. The descriptions of nine common malfunctions and their corrective measures follow.1.or right-hand feed.7.50 caliber heavy machine gun is an effective and reliable weapon.2 Round Will Not Chamber 1. 11. It is important to understand. and firing pin extension. 4. 2. 4. Check to see if bolt returns to forward position.7. Determine if left. Check chamber and T-slot for obstruction.6. 11. 3.4 Weapon Will Not Cock 1. Notify unit maintenance. This represents the maximum amount of ammunition that can be expended by the weapon without a break in firing. Check for tight headspace. Check notch on sear.1. Adjust headspace. 2. Clear and clean chamber. Check sear spring and bolt switch for proper installation. 11. burrs.7. 3.7.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun The M2 .1.or right-hand feed).1. 2. or cracked/bent rod. Clean and lubricate. Check retracting slide lever for wear and proper installation.4 Cyclic Fire The cyclic rate of the M2 is 450 to 600 rounds per minute. Therefore the appropriate remedial action will be based on the cause of the malfunction or stoppage. 11.1. however. If obstruction was ruptured cartridge. Both malfunctions and stoppages are discussed in the next two sections.

11. Check for early timing if weapon repeatedly fires two rounds and then fails to feed. Check for incorrectly installed sear slide.NTRP 3-07. Adjust headspace. 6.2 11.1.1. Check headspace. Check if cover is completely down and latched. Open cover and remove short round or align link. Check for bent/cracked driving spring rod or weak or broken rod springs. Notify unit maintenance. 4. Clean the interior of the bolt with a swab saturated with RBC solvent. 7. Notify unit maintenance. Notify maintenance. 11.7. preventing ejection. 2. Check firing pin well inside bolt for obstruction.1. Check for ruptured cartridge. 3. Adjust headspace and timing. Check ammunition belt for short round or misfired link. Check for correct cartridge stop. 2. Adjust timing. 2. 5. 2.8 Weapon Will Not Fire 1. Install sear slide from left side. 5.5 Weapon Will Not Eject 1. 3. 4. Adjust headspace. Note If weapon still will not fire.2. AUG 2003 11-6 . These can cause the spent brass to bind in the T-slot. Remove ruptured cartridge.1. Check bolt space for enlarged firing pin hole and deformed firing pin. 3. Check chamber for excessive pitting. Lubricate by applying light coat of lubricating oil to interior of bolt. Inspect firing pin and firing pin extension for burrs or broken firing pin spring.1. Check for incorrect timing.1. 6. Cartridge stop for blank ammunition is not the same as for live ammunition.7.1. Replace barrel.7 Weapon Will Not Feed 1. Notify unit maintenance. Lubricate as necessary. tight headspace will cause binding and excessive friction between the moving parts during recoil. Check for weak or broken belt holding pawl assembly or belt feed pawl springs. refer to TM 9-2350-255-10 or TM 9-2350-264-10. Notify maintenance. 11.1. Notify unit maintenance. Remove defective ammunition.7. Adjust timing. Check for broken or damaged firing pin. Check for improper lubrication. Check for defective ammunition.6 Weapon Will Not Extract 1.7.

During training. Remedial actions for both cold and hot weapons follow. After waiting 15 minutes. close the cover assembly and attempt to fire.7. If it does not fire. 2. 11. if the stoppage occurs with a hot weapon. When a stoppage does occur. the muzzle should always be pointed in a safe direction.1. reload and continue to fire. If there is a round in the chamber. Whenever performing remedial action. Check for incorrect timing. reload and attempt to fire.1. If the weapon still does not fire. clear the weapon. a cold weapon is one that has fired less than 150 rounds in a 2-minute period. apply remedial action. If the weapon fires. Wait 5 seconds for a possible hangfire. Adjust timing.50 caliber heavy machine gun.7.1 Cold Weapon For purposes of this publication. reload and attempt to fire. If it does not fire during training. 2.2 Stoppages A stoppage is an unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation. 1.2 11. reapply remedial action as necessary.1.NTRP 3-07. reapply remedial action as necessary.7. If the weapon fires.7. If there is a round in the chamber. Proper care includes keeping the weapon clean and well-lubricated. carefully raise the cover. and investigate the cause. 11-7 AUG 2003 . 2. clear and inspect the weapon and ammunition. Inspect the weapon and ammunition. Many stoppages of the M2 occur as a result of shooter error.3. Inspect the weapon and ammunition. If there is no round in the chamber.3 General Remedial Action to Clear Stoppages To keep the M2 in action. 1. Pull the bolt to the rear.9 Weapon Will Not Unlock 1. 11. wait 5 seconds for a possible hangfire. 4. remove the ammunition. a hot weapon is one that has fired 150 or more rounds in a 2-minute period. If there is no round in the chamber.2 Hot Weapon For purposes of this publication. 3. wait 5 seconds for a possible hangfire. Inspect the chamber and the T-slot.3. Stoppages are normally discovered when the machine gun will not fire. prepared personnel must quickly identify and remedy problems to get the weapon back into action.1. Note Many stoppages can be prevented by properly caring for the M2 . reload and continue to fire. and inspect the chamber and T-slot. then let the weapon cool for 15 minutes. 11. raise the cover assembly. and remove the belt of ammunition.2. 3. it is important to clear any stoppage as quickly as possible. 11. close the cover assembly and attempt to fire.7. If the weapon still does not fire.1.1. wait another 15 minutes.

operation. cover assembly closed. the machine gun will fire automatically. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M2 from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the M2 . General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2.2. Weapon condition codes applicable to the M2 are defined in Figure 11-6.2. M2 . The standardized procedures that follow. check the weapon for dirt. No ammunition present on the feed tray. 11. and employment of any weapon. Not applicable. CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Ammunition on feed tray. when consistently and properly used. cover assembly closed. Figure 11-6.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes AUG 2003 11-8 . 11.50 has no manual safety. excess oil.2 11. will result in safe and proficient handling of the M2. bolt forward.2 M2 .3. 11.NTRP 3-07. will maximize safety during weapons handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon.2. unloading.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the safety features. Check the magazine spring for proper tension and to ensure there are no defects. Ammunition on feed tray. by four weapon condition codes. The M2 . bolt forward on an empty chamber.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. Note Before loading the M2. The gunner ensures that the bolt is forward and the feed tray cover remains closed. When the bolt latch and trigger are both held down. like other Navy weapons. and conditions of readiness specific to the M2. and grease.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun on the Range The weapon handling commands as defined in Figure 11-7 are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4. bolt forward on empty chamber. The commands set forth in Figure 11-7.3 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the M2 .2. when consistently applied.2.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the M2 . 11. round in the chamber.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. cover assembly closed.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun The M2’s safety status is defined.

2. The gunner pulls the bolt to the rear (palms up) and returns the retracting slide handle fully forward.2. The gunner unlocks the bolt latch release (if applicable). Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. the gunner depresses the bolt latch release and allows the bolt to carry itself forward. The gunner pulls the bolt to the rear (palms up) and returns the retracting slide handle fully forward. 3. The gunner raises the cover assembly.3. 11. Figure 11-7.2.3.2 COMMAND Load Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload.NTRP 3-07. 2. 11. engaged by extractor). If the bolt latch release is up.2. If the bolt latch release is up. the gunner shall hold down the trigger and bolt latch to engage the target. 1. The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray. 11-9 AUG 2003 . Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. With a second individual.3 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE.3.5 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M2 from Condition 3 to Condition 1.3. the gunner depresses the bolt latch release and allows the bolt to carry itself forward (half load — round is on top of bolt. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. chambering a round (full load — round is in chamber). 4.4 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. 3.2. M2 . personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M2 from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Cease engagement of the target. the gunner shall place the trigger finger straight along the trigger guard and stop engaging the target area. 11. Engage the target. 2.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. 11. The assistant gunner inserts the double-loop end of the ammunition belt into the feed tray until the first round is engaged by the holding pawl.50 Caliber Heavy Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands 2. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4.

The gunner pulls and locks the bolt to the rear and examines the chamber and T-slot in the face of the bolt to ensure no ammunition is present. Once the chamber and receiver are clear. buildings.2.3. streams. The card provides azimuth and range to the features. bridges. 6. woods. the gunner depresses the bolt latch release to send the bolt forward and closes the feed tray cover. 2.5 M2 . SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. 3. 11. AUG 2003 11-10 .50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN RANGE CARD A range card is a rough sketch of the terrain that a weapon has been assigned to cover by fire. 11.NTRP 3-07. 11.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the M2. The gunner pulls and locks the bolt to the rear and examines the chamber and T-slot in the face of the bolt to ensure no ammunition is present. The gunner unlocks the bolt latch release (if applicable). 11. 1. The sketch on the card includes roads.3 M2 . The assistant gunner removes the ammunition and links from the feed tray. The gunner raises the cover assembly. 5. hills.4 M2 . personnel shall perform the following steps to take the M2 from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4.50 CALIBER HEAVY MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 M2 is issued from and returned to the armory. which permits quick and accurate engagement of targets within the assigned sector of fire. 5.2 4. 4. and any other significant physical feature within the sector of fire. SW 361-AB-MMO-010. After receiving acknowledgment that the weapon is clear.2. The gunner has another person inspect the weapon to ensure no ammunition is present.6 Procedures to UNLOAD. the gunner depresses the bolt latch release to send the bolt forward and closes the feed tray cover. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operator’s Manual. SHOW CLEAR.

2. It fires a variety of 40mm grenades with antipersonnel fragmentation and light antiarmor capability from the open bolt position and is left-hand feed only.1.NTRP 3-07.2 CHAPTER 12 MK19 MOD 3 40MM Grenade Machine Gun 12. disintegrating metallic link belt-fed. This information is essential to promote effective employment of the weapon and maximize safety during handling. 12. Top Cover Receiver Assembly Sear Assembly Figure 12-1. blowbackoperated. is an air-cooled. major components. and remedial actions. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun 12-1 AUG 2003 .1 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION This section provides the description of the MK19 MOD 3 40mm grenade machine gun and information necessary to understand the MK19’s technical characteristics. shown in Figures 12-1 and 12-2. fully automatic weapon that can be a vehicle or ground-mounted machine gun and is crew transportable. It fires 40mm grenades at the rate of 325 to 375 rounds per minute.1 Description of MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun The MK19. cycle of operation.

12.NTRP 3-07.3 Major Components of the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun The MK19 has six major component groups.4. and Stoppages for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun To ensure the MK19 is readily available for action. 12. Personnel must be prepared to recognize and correct any malfunctions or stoppages. 12.2.2 Malfunctions A malfunction is a failure of the MK19 to function satisfactorily or to perform as designed.1. A malfunction does not necessarily cause an interruption in the cycle of operation.2 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the MK19 grenade machine gun are listed in Figure 12-3. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Side View 12. 12. as described in Figure 12-4. it is important to understand the routine cycle of operation.4.1.1. AUG 2003 12-2 .1 MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Cycle of Operation The eight steps in the cycle of operation for the MK19 are listed in Figure 12-5. Never mix live ammunition and dummy ammunition.1.4 Cycle of Operation. Malfunctions.1.2 Front Sight Top Cover Charger Handle Rear Sight Trigger Feeder Charger Handle Feed Throat Assembly Bolt and Backplate Assembly Safe/Fire Swith Figure 12-2. Seven common malfunctions of the MK19 and the associated immediate actions are shown below.

Full-auto blowback Ammo can 48 or 32 rounds linked 77.1 in (1.257 ft (2. Pull charger handles to the rear as far as possible. and ensure bolt stays to the rear when releasing charger handles.2 kg) 43. Logistics.921 ft (1.NTRP 3-07.500 m) 7.4. 2.6 lb (35. causing severe injury. Prepare to catch ejected live round.2 WEAPON SPECIFICATIONS Model NSN Manufacturer Mechanism Type Magazine Type Ammo Capacity Weight (empty) Overall Length Barrel Length Muzzle Velocity Maximum Effective Range Point Target Area Target Cyclic rate of fire Caliber MK19 MOD 3 1010-01-126-9063 Saco Inc. The following procedures/steps must be performed in sequence to open top cover. Press charger handle locks and rotate charger handles down. 12-3 AUG 2003 .1. Place weapon on safe.2. and Safeties 12. Be prepared to catch ejected round. 4.212 m) 325 to 375 rounds/min 40mm.1 Bolt Jammed 1. Insert cleaning rod section through slot in side of receiver. until bolt locks.000 rounds SW363-C3-MMM-010 SW363-C3-MMM-010 Technical manual # Operator manual # SAFETIES Figure 12-3. Bolt could spring forward suddenly and fire a round. 3.095 mm) 16. 5. Ammunition. high-velocity In-service date Life expectancy AMMUNITION High-explosive (M383 and M384) Practice (M385 and M918) High-explosive dual-purpose (M430) Dummy (M922) LOGISTICS 1981 25. without stopping or pausing.25 in (413 mm) 244 fps (74 mps) Selector lever 4. Maintain rearward pressure on charger handles while assistant gunner lifts top cover. Pull charger handles to rear.2. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Specifications.

Holds rounds in feeder and indexes ammunition into position for delinking. which forces the projectile out of the barrel. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Major Components STEP Feeding Chambering Locking Firing Unlocking Extracting Ejecting Cocking ACTION Placement of a round in the path of the bolt.NTRP 3-07. allowing for extraction. Attaches to forward (left side) of receiver by two sets of spring-loaded retaining pins. Without feed throat. Holds receiver sear. Expulsion of the spent cartridge case out of and away from the receiver. Provides smooth feeding of 40mm ammunition. Compression of firing pin spring. Trigger and handgrips are located on backplate assembly. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Cycle of Operation AUG 2003 12-4 . Feed Throat Assembly Figure 12-4. Unlocking of the bolt occurs after the round leaves the barrel and propellant gases force the bolt to the rear. Ignition of the propellant within the cartridge case. Fires round when sear is depressed by trigger action. Recoil springs drive bolt forward on receiver rails. Opened by latch (left side) for loading or to clean and inspect feeder area. Safety is attached to sear assembly. Trigger action releases sear and allows bolt to go forward.2 MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Receiver Assembly Feed Slide Assembly and Tray Top Cover Assembly Sear Assembly Bolt and Backplate Assembly FUNCTION Serves as a support for all major components. Pushing of the round into the chamber by the bolt. Figure 12-5. machine gun stoppages may occur because of twisted or misaligned rounds.2. Locking occurs as the bolt closes. Guide rods hold springs in position. Ammunition is fed into left side of receiver through feed throat assembly. Holds feed slide assembly and tray. Withdrawal of the spent round from the chamber. The mass of the bolt holds the breech momentarily closed.

12. Hold bolt to the rear and insert cleaning rod through receiver rail to top of the shell casing as close to the face of the bolt as possible. 8. and primary drive lever. Depress feed pawls. Check for any type of obstruction.NTRP 3-07. Ensure secondary drive lever is engaged with the feed slide pin. Place weapon on safe. Do not relink any ammunition that has been cycled through the weapon. If bolt jams. Place hand underneath as close to the round as possible. Remove obstruction per round removal procedures. Ride the bolt forward by grasping one charger handle and depressing the trigger. 9. Raise cleaning rod to force live round down. Place weapon on fire. 15. release the ammunition belt. 11. engage forked end with feed slide pin. 12-5 AUG 2003 . 3. Place selector lever on fire. Insert bore obstruction detector into bore to check for a live round. 7. Catch live round as it is ejected.2 Bore Obstruction 1. repeat steps a through g. Move the ammunition belt and can to a safe area. 5. and clear the feed area.2. forcing the round off the bolt face into the hand. 10. Remove the backplate pin. notify the range safety officer immediately. 4. During training. 12. Ensure feed slide assembly is to the left.4. Close top cover gently. If not. Raise cleaning rod upward. 13. vertical cam assembly. Reposition ammunition belt in feeder. 10. 2. Charge gun and hold the bolt to rear. 7. Put weapon on safe and send to armorer. 14. 6. 8. Remove the round to designated area for explosive ordnance disposal. Remove the empty case catch bag.1. Check for and remove any case or round from the bolt face.2. Ease the bolt forward. Charge weapon and attempt to fire. 9.2 6. Remove ammunition belt from feeder. bolt and backplate assembly.

4. AUG 2003 12-6 .4 Runaway Gun (Uncontrolled Automatic Fire) 1. 12. Maintain rearward pressure on charger handles. Notify range safety officer. send it to armorer. Place weapon on safe. 3. as far as possible. Place weapon on safe.NTRP 3-07. Notify range safety officer. Cease fire.4. Clear weapon.1.5 Short Recoil 1. 3. 3. Place weapon on safe. Never try to break the ammunition belt by hand. as serious injury could result. Clear area of personnel and ammunition.2. 5.4. 2. 2.2. After weapon has been cleared by proper personnel. • • Do not attempt to clear the weapon if the weapon fires too soon (out-of-battery). Pull charger handles to the rear. 12. Lower one charger handle to stop gun from firing. Ensure bolt stays to the rear when releasing charger handles. Follow procedures as given below.3 Gun Fires Too Soon 1. Keep gun pointed downrange and slightly elevated. Do not attempt to clear or fire the weapon until it is fixed.4. 2.1. and gun will stop. without stopping or pausing. Press charger handle locks and lower charger handles. Check barrel for lodged round using bore obstruction detector. Clear area of personnel and ammunition.1. 4. 5. without stopping or pausing. 6.2 12. 4. until bolt locks. Pull charger handles to the rear.2. Report the condition to armorer.2.

Any of these three signals means a bore obstruction. 9. Check for bore obstruction using bore obstruction detector. For bolt sear timing adjustment. clean bore and chamber. refer to WP 0014 00 for round removal procedures.4. Gunner should observe downrange and attempt to determine if the round left the barrel. For dirty bore or chamber. Catch live round as it is ejected.NTRP 3-07.6 Sluggish or Erratic Firing This may be caused by one of the following three problems. 12.2. 3.2. Put weapon on safe and send to armorer. send to armorer. Charge weapon and attempt to fire. or (3) failure of the projectile to leave the muzzle. 7. be alert to these three danger signals: (1) a muffled report from the gun. reposition belt in feeder. 15.1. If bore is obstructed. 8. Remove bolt and backplate assembly from weapon. Prepare to catch ejected live round. When firing HE or TP ammunition. 11. Push against recoil springs to test for weakness. or serious injury could result. 13. repeat steps a through g. For defective recoil springs or guide rods: a. If there is no obstruction.2 6. Raise top cover. 2. 10. 12-7 AUG 2003 . Report defects to armorer. 12. Insert cleaning rod section through slot in side of receiver. Actions to correct each problem are listed below: 1. Remove ammunition belt from feeder. (2) smoke and debris from the bottom of the receiver. Ensure feed slide assembly is to the left. Be sure bolt is forward before removing backplate pin assembly. b. 14. Raise cleaning rod to force live round down. If bolt jams.

prepared personnel must quickly identify and remedy problems to get the machine gun back into action. Clean any dirt from feeder. the weapon will not fire.3 Stoppages An unintentional interruption in the cycle of operation is referred to as a stoppage.7 Top Cover Will Not Close This may be caused by one of the following three problems. c. For improper position of feed slide assembly.4. When a stoppage does occur. Push charger handles forward and rotate charger handles up until they lock. Actions to correct each problem are listed below: 1. Pull charger handles to the rear until the bolt sears. or shooter error. g. attempt to determine the cause of the stoppage using the following procedures: a. repeat steps (2) through (6) and have weapon inspected by an armorer. During peacetime and training. For bolt to rear.4. Ensure links are evenly aligned in the link guide and on rounds. If weapon does not fire. f. c. Catch any live round as it is ejected. The four procedures that follow provide specific actions necessary to effectively respond to common stoppages. improper function of the weapon.2. Spring should touch cover. Clear the weapon.1. use the following procedures: a. ride the bolt forward. Stoppages are normally discovered when the machine gun will not fire. 2. move feed slide assembly all the way left. d. b. Stoppages of the MK19 may be caused by faulty ammunition. If either handle is down. In combat situations only. Place weapon on safe.NTRP 3-07. ensure rounds are straight and firmly seated in the feeder.3. Wait 10 seconds for hangfire. 3. Clear the area of personnel.4. Press charger handle locks and rotate charger handles down. 12.1.1.2. b. 12. For misaligned ammunition.2 12. Put weapon on safe and check for bore obstruction.1 Misfire 1. If bore is clear. AUG 2003 12-8 . 2. e. Note Both charger handles must be forward and up for firing. move safe to fire position and attempt to fire.

4.1. remove round from belt. 12-9 AUG 2003 . 12. remove linked ammunition from feeder. • • Do not use combat misfire procedures during peacetime or training. remove from bolt face. when consistently applied. 3. dispose of round as authorized.3. check the firing pin/spring.NTRP 3-07. If charging is not possible. check the firing pin. leave the bolt in rear position and the gun on safe.2.2 d.1. will maximize safety during weapons handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon.1. and operation specific to the MK19 MOD 3 40mm grenade machine gun. Put gun on safe. If the primer is not indented.4. The standardized procedures included in this section.4 Bad Firing Pin 1.3. If the round is not on bolt face. b.3. and reload. report the defect to the armorer. Ensure female link is first. Aim weapon on target and fire.3. Follow the procedures listed in paragraph 12. Do not relink or fire ammunition that has been cycled through the weapon. Serious injury can result if precautions are not observed.1. 12. remove link.3 Ammunition Jammed in Feeder 1. e. If the primer is indented but round did not fire. If the round is on the bolt face. dispose of round as authorized. 2. remove round and dispose of as authorized. and reload. 2. 3. 12.2 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the conditions of safety. c. d.2 Bad Ammunition 1.4. 12. ensure link band is even and adjacent to copper band for all ammunition. readiness. If the rounds are crooked or not seated firmly. Check for proper attachment of feed throat. 2. Turn in live round as instructed by current directives. For a broken link: a. On ammunition. follow the procedures listed in paragraph 12.1.3. If the primer on the ejected round is not indented.4.2.1. If within weapon. If the link is off the rotating band.4. If the firing pin tip fails to spring forward.

2. unloading. Weapon condition codes applicable to the MK19 are defined in Figure 12-6. No round in the chamber. no ammunition in the feeder. no round in the chamber. Ensure that the rounds are straight and firmly seated against the side of the bolt. cover assembly closed and latched. as defined in Figure 12-7. The commands set forth in Figure 12-7.2. 3. 5. 7. female link first. weapon on safe. Figure 12-6. when consistently and properly used. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Weapon Condition Codes AUG 2003 12-10 . ammunition in the feeder.NTRP 3-07. by one of four weapon condition codes. Not applicable. bolt forward. The MK19 will be kept in Condition 1 during normal security operations.2. ammunition in the feeder. With the cover open. Ensure the weapon is in Condition 4.1 Procedures to LOAD On the command LOAD. no round on the bolt face. and employment of any weapon. Push/slide the round across the first pawl until it clicks.2 Weapon Handling Commands for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Weapon handling commands are issued by a supervisor in the chain of command to direct the loading. cover assembly closed and latched.1 Weapon Condition Codes for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun The MK19’s safety status is defined. 4.3. 12. Bolt locked to the rear. General weapon condition codes are listed in Figure 1-2. are executed as set forth in the following paragraphs. weapon on safe. palms down.2.2. weapon on safe. into the feeder. 12. Close the top cover. Pull the bolt to the rear.3 Safe Weapon Handling Procedures for the MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun on the Range The weapon handling commands. round on the bolt face. 12. CONDITION 1 2 3 4 ACTION Bolt locked to the rear. no round in the chamber. insert the first round. like other Navy weapons. Move the feed slide assembly to the left. cover assembly closed and latched. 6. will result in safe and proficient handling of the MK19. 2. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the MK19 from Condition 4 to Condition 3: 1.2 12. Open the feed tray cover.

2. Push the charger handles forward. With a second individual.4 Procedures to CEASE FIRE On the command CEASE FIRE. Press the trigger while holding onto one of the charger handles.NTRP 3-07. 6. Check the bore to ensure it is free of foreign matter and obstructions. Ride the bolt home. 12-11 AUG 2003 . Take the weapon from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. and grease.2 COMMAND Load Make Ready Fire Cease Fire Unload Unload. The first round is now loaded on the bolt face. Note Before loading the MK19. Show Clear ACTION Take the weapon from Condition 4 to Condition 3. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the MK19 from Condition 3 to Condition 1: 1. Figure 12-7. check the weapon for dirt. personnel shall place the trigger finger straight along the trigger guard and stop engaging the target area. Cease engagement of the target. Rotate the handles up and place the weapon on safe. Take the weapon from Condition 3 to Condition 1. personnel shall take the weapon off safe and pull the trigger to engage the target. 9. 3.2.3. Place the weapon on safe if the situation permits. Push the charger handles back to the forward position. check the weapon to verify that no ammunition is present before the weapon is put in Condition 4. 2. 5.2 Procedures to MAKE READY On the command MAKE READY. excess oil. Place the weapon on fire. Engage the target. Rotate the charger handles up. 4.2.2. 12.3.3 Procedures to FIRE On the command FIRE.3. MK19 MOD 3 40mm Grenade Machine Gun Weapon Handling Commands 8. 12. This pulls the bolt with the loaded round into position for firing. 12. Pull the charger handles to the rear.

and slide the rounds out of the feeder. press the primary pawl and the secondary pawl.3. while the free hand should be positioned underneath the weapon to catch the round as it falls. close the cover. refer to SW363-C3-MMM-010.2.NTRP 3-07. After receiving acknowledgment that the weapon is clear. ride the bolt home. press the primary pawl and the secondary pawl. place the weapon on fire. lock the bolt to the rear. refer to the applicable Maintenance Requirements Card or Operators Manual. and place the weapon on safe. AUG 2003 12-12 . The cleaning rod should be as close as possible to the bolt face. 5. Inspect the chamber and the face of the bolt to ensure no ammunition is present. 4. 12. SHOW CLEAR On the command UNLOAD. Insert a cleaning rod through the right side receiver rail and push down on the round on the bolt face. while the free hand should be positioned underneath the weapon to catch the round as it falls. 12. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the MK19 from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4: 1. Have another person inspect the weapon to ensure no ammunition is present. 4. personnel shall perform the following steps to take the MK19 from Condition 1 or 3 to Condition 4. 12. The cleaning rod should be as close as possible to the bolt face. 1. 3. 6.6 Procedures to UNLOAD. and place the weapon on safe. and place the weapon on safe. Ensure the weapon is on fire. 7. and slide the rounds out of the feeder. Once the chamber and receiver are clear. 5. 12. close the cover. Open the top cover.3. Once the chamber and receiver are clear. Inspect the chamber and the face of the bolt to ensure no ammunition is present. depress the bolt latch release to send the bolt forward and close the feed tray cover. and place the weapon on safe. Insert a cleaning rod through the right side receiver rail and push down on the round on the bolt face.2 12. 2. SHOW CLEAR.2. SW363-C3-MMM-010.3 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN ISSUE TO/RECOVERY FROM THE ARMORY Standardized armory procedures ensure that only a Condition 4 MK19 is issued from and returned to the armory.2. lock the bolt to the rear.5 Procedures to UNLOAD On the command UNLOAD. 3. Open the top cover. Ensure the weapon is on fire. ride the bolt home. place the weapon on fire. 2.4 MK19 MOD 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY AND FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURES For guidance on the disassembly/assembly and function check of the MK19 MOD 3 40mm grenade machine gun.5 MK19 MOD 3 40MM GRENADE MACHINE GUN SHOOTING FUNDAMENTALS For guidance on machine gun marksmanship.

NTRP 3-07.192 feet per second and causes internal damage and bleeding as it passes through open air voids in the body of a swimmer (ear drum.1. and against hostile underwater swimmers.1 MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION The MK 3A2 concussion grenade is an offensive weapon designed to counter and repel threats. produce enemy casualties during close combat. 13.1 Description of the MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade The MK 3A2 concussion grenade (Figure 13-1) has a black and yellow cylindrical body made of pressed fiber that contains high-explosive TNT.2 CHAPTER 13 MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade 13. and fortified areas.407 HAND MK III A-2 I-53 Yellow Markings Body (Black) Figure 13-1. Internal injuries force the swimmer to surface. and minimize fragmentation hazards to friendly troops. An underwater shock wave has a velocity of 4.2. The MK 3A2 produces a large shock wave on the ground and in the air. An even greater shock wave is produced under water. thereby neutralizing a potential threat and permitting apprehension by security personnel. lungs. stomach). buildings. MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade 13-1 AUG 2003 . Pull Ring Safety Pin Safety Lever GRENAD E OF FENSIVE 3. Concussion grenade blasts are effective against enemy personnel located in bunkers.

lead styphnate.2.275 in (134 mm) Black with yellow markings TNT (flaked) 8 oz (227 g) M206A1 or M206A2 Pyrotechnic delay detonating M42 Lead azide. 6. MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Technical Characteristics AUG 2003 13-2 . 13. and RDX 4–5 seconds 2. 13.1.6 oz (442 g) 5. Can be thrown 131 ft (40 m) by average person. Figure 13-2. The standardized procedures included in this section.1. MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS PART Grenade (with fuze) Body Weight Length (max) Color Explosive Filler Type Weight Fuze Model Type Primer Detonator Delay time Weight Length Color Safety Devices Range Effective Casualty Radius CHARACTERISTICS Asphalt-impregnated fiber 15.2 MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE SAFE OPERATION PROCEDURES This section provides the information necessary to understand the safety features and proper operation of the MK 3A2.NTRP 3-07.3 MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Major Components Major components of the MK 3A2 concussion grenade are described in Figure 13-3. when consistently applied. Secondary missiles and bits of fuze may be projected as far as 650 ft (198 m) from detonation point on ground. Pull ring and safety pin and safety clip (fuzed grenades).5 ft (2 m) on land in an open area.3 in (109 mm) Olive drab with black markings Pull ring and safety pin (fuzed grenades).6 oz (74 g) 4.2 13.2 MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Technical Characteristics Technical characteristics specific to the MK 3A2 concussion grenade are listed in Figure 13-2. will maximize safety during handling and promote the effective employment of this weapon.

Remove cardboard cap.2. 13. Extra hand grenades should be carried inside a rucksack or a utility bag.3 Remove Safety Clip Properly grip the MK 3A2 in the throwing hand with the safety lever secured under the thumb between the knuckle and the base of the thumb and remove the safety clip that fits around the fuze and over the safety lever. quickly observe the target to establish the distance between the throwing position and the target area.2. 3.4 Remove Safety Pin 1. 4. 13. Do not carry the MK 3A2 without a safety clip in place. Hold the MK 3A2 in the throwing hand and grasp the safety pin pull ring with the index or middle finger of the nonthrowing hand. 2.2. Remove canister lid. Left-handed personnel should hold the grenade upside down in the left hand.1 Remove From Shipping Canister 1.2. Personnel should only open the canister when a clear and present threat warrants immediate usage of the MK 3A2. 13-3 AUG 2003 .2. taped-up shipping canister.1 MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Handling and Deployment Procedures The six-step procedure to handle and deploy the MK 3A2 follows. 2. Remove tape from storage canister. Note No hand grenades shall be attached to any equipment by the pull ring or the safety lever. Note MK 3A2 concussion grenades are to be issued to personnel in an unopened. 13.NTRP 3-07. Remove the safety pin with a pulling. Under no circumstances shall any hand grenade be carried in the uniform pocket.1.2.2 13. so that the safety lever is secured under the thumb between the knuckle and the base of the thumb and the safety pin pull ring is visible and easily accessible to the right hand.1. Ensure that there is a safety clip attached to the fuze. twisting motion.2 Observe Target After the MK 3A2 is removed from the shipping canister. 13.1. 3. Visually observe removal of the safety pin.1. Remove grenade from canister.

igniting delay element. Released by removal of the safety clip and safety pin. Pyrotechnic delay detonating fuze.1. and TNT filler.2.5 Look at Target Look at the target to estimate the distance between the throwing position and the target area and to confirm target position. 13. Cylinder made of pressed fiber. After throwing the grenade. intense spit of flame. Prevents unintentional removal of the pull ring.NTRP 3-07. AUG 2003 13-4 . 13. Contains primer. MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Major Components 13.6 Throw Throw the MK 3A2 using the overhand method so that the grenade arcs.1.2.2. Emits small. Figure 13-3. pyrotechnic delay column. Rotates on its axis and strikes the percussion primer after release by safety clip and safety pin. landing on or near the target. Provides stored energy to rotate striker.2 MK 3A2 CONCUSSION GRENADE MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Safety Clip Safety Pin Safety Lever Striker Striker Spring Percussion Primer Fuze Detonator Assembly Body FUNCTION Clamps down to fit over the safety lever. to improve distance and accuracy and relieve throwing arm strain. Explodes to ignite TNT filler.2 Throwing Positions for Employment of the MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade The four throwing positions used to train users with proper employment of MK 3A2 concussion grenades are described in Figure 13-4. 4–5 second delay.2. Allow the motion of the throwing arm to continue naturally once the MK 3A2 is released. Loop of spring steel wire fitted around threaded section of fuze. get behind available cover to reduce exposure to fragmentation and direct enemy fire.

forward foot pointed at the target. Used primarily when cover from a low wall. Align hips and shoulders on an axis pointed at the target. Toss the grenade forward toward the target.2. Used only when an individual is pinned down by hostile fire and is unable to rise to engage target. Reduces distance and accuracy. Shock waves can be heard and felt by personnel in the ship below the waterline. Explosive safety experts recommend dropping the grenade no closer than 10 feet to the hull of a ship. Raise the nonthrowing hand shoulder high.2. Hold the throwing hand shoulder high and cocked behind the head. After pulling the safety pin. Provides maximum distance.2. Used by shipboard and pier sentries to engage enemy swimmers and combat divers along a quay wall or ship hull.3 Prone Position Lie flat on back with body pointed headfirst at the target. 13. Raise the nonthrowing hand above the head. Follow through until the throwing arm is again fully extended toward the target. with the arm extended and pointed at the target.2. with the arm fully extended and pointed at the target.4 Pull and Drop Face the target with both hands extended forward. lower the nonthrowing arm to the side and bend the throwing elbow 90 degrees.NTRP 3-07.2.2. or similar cover is required. shoulder high. 13. Extend the throwing hand downward along the leg. Figure 13-4. Hold the throwing hand shoulder high and cocked behind the head.2. 13-5 AUG 2003 .2.2 Kneeling Position Kneel on forward knee (knee closest to target) and fully extend aft leg behind the body. shallow ditch. 13.2 GRENADE THROWING POSITIONS POSITION Standing Kneeling Prone Pull and Drop RATIONALE FOR POSITION The most desirable and natural form of deployment. MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Throwing Positions 13.2. with the arm extended and pointed at the target. Raise the nonthrowing hand shoulder high. Reduces distance.1 Standing Position Place feet shoulder-width apart.

Do not attempt to replace the safety pin in a dud-fired MK 3A2.3 Nondetonated MK 3A2 Concussion Grenade Precautions An MK 3A2 that has not detonated as designed (dud-fired) may function at any time. A dud-fired MK 3A2 could still function at any time. • • Do not approach a MK 3A2 that has not detonated as designed.2 13.NTRP 3-07.2. AUG 2003 13-6 . or by a mechanical obstruction such as a hung cocked striker.2. Contact explosive ordnance disposal specialists to investigate and handle a dud-fired MK 3A2. A random delay may be caused by deterioration or dampness that prolongs the burning time of the pyrotechnic delay.

NTRP 3-07.2.2

CHAPTER 14

Nonlethal Weapons
14.1 DEFINITION OF NONLETHAL WEAPONS Nonlethal weapons are explicitly designed and employed to discourage and incapacitate personnel while minimizing fatalities and undesired damage to property and the environment. The term nonlethal is used within a context of intent. No fatal injury to personnel or permanent damage to property are goals, not guarantees, of these weapons. Nonlethal weapons add flexibility to combat operations and enhance force protection, consistent with prevailing rules of engagement, by allowing friendly troops to engage threatening targets with limited risk of noncombatant casualties and collateral damage. Note Use of deadly force must always remain an option of individuals in instances when they, their fellow servicemen, or personnel in their charge are threatened with death or serious bodily harm. Two nonlethal weapons will be discussed in this chapter: the riot baton and Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) spray. 14.2 RIOT BATON The riot baton, seen in Figure 14-1, is an impact weapon that, when used correctly, plays an important part in the continuum of force model.

Grip End Long Portion

Grip Portion

Long End

Figure 14-1. Riot Baton

14-1

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

14.2.1 Description of the Riot Baton The four basic components of the riot baton displayed in Figure 14-1 are described in Figure 14-2 below. 14.2.2 Riot Baton Carries, Grips, and Draws Correct carrying, gripping, and drawing techniques maximize control and effective use of the baton. This section describes four carries, two grips, and four draws associated with proper use of the baton. 14.2.2.1 Riot Baton Carries The four basic methods used to carry the baton are described in detail in the following paragraphs. 14.2.2.1.1 Vertical Carry The baton is held in the strong hand with the long end pointed toward the ground. The weak hand remains up and ready to enhance blocking. The baton is held either down to the side of the strong leg for high visibility or behind the strong leg for low profile. This carry is used when there is an open area to land strong, fluid strikes. The vertical carry is used after executing the cross draw or strong side draw. (Refer to paragraph 14.2.2.3.) 14.2.2.1.2 Outside Arm Carry The baton is held outside of the strong arm at a 45-degree angle to the ground with the long portion against the upper arm between the strong elbow and the strong shoulder. The short portion of the baton serves as a simulated muzzle. The long end must not be placed on top of the shoulder, which will cause incorrect execution of the forward strike. The outside arm carry is used for all forward and reverse strikes. (Refer to paragraph 14.2.3.2.) This technique is also used as a high-profile carry. 14.2.2.1.3 Two-Handed Carry The baton is carried with both the strong and weak hands. The grip portion is held with the strong hand while grasping the long portion of the baton with the weak hand, palm down, approximately 2 to 4 inches from the long end of the baton. The strong hand is pulled in close against the strong side hip. The long portion of the baton serves as the muzzle. When executing a strike, the baton will strike or jab the particular area where the long portion is pointed. The baton must be pointed at a 45-degree angle toward the ground. The two-handed carry is used with all blocks and two-handed jabs and strikes.

RIOT BATON BASIC COMPONENTS PART Long End Long Portion Grip End Grip Portion LOCATION Located on the end of the long portion of the baton. Located between the long end and the grip portion of the baton. Located at the base of the grip portion. Located between the long portion and the grip end of the baton, the hand hold for the baton.

Figure 14-2. Riot Baton Basic Components

AUG 2003

14-2

NTRP 3-07.2.2

14.2.2.1.4 Extended Carry This carry is similar to the two-handed carry in that both hands are on the baton. The weak hand remains palm down to provide better stability and strength. The baton is carried at a 45-degree angle with the long end pointing up. The hands are spread to 36-inch length for better reach. This carry is primarily used to give better reach when striking and blocking in a riot control formation. Most blocks and strikes can be executed from the extended carry. 14.2.2.2 Riot Baton Grips Correct grip techniques on the baton are essential to the execution of proper drawing techniques. The two types of grips are described in the following paragraphs. 14.2.2.2.1 One-Hand Grip The grip portion of the straight baton is grasped with the strong hand one to two inches from the grip end. The thumb and index finger of the strong hand should always be touching each other. This is essential to maintaining control of the one-hand grip. 14.2.2.2.2 Two-Hand/Long Grip The grip portion of the straight baton is grasped with the strong hand one to two inches from the grip end. The long portion is grasped with the weak hand (palm down) about two inches from the long end of the straight baton. The thumb and index finger on the strong hand are essential to maintaining control of the two-hand/long grip while the thumb and the index finger of the weak hand support the long portion of the top of the baton. The weak hand remains palm down on the long portion when in the two-hand carry position. 14.2.2.3 Riot Baton Draws The four basic methods used to draw the riot baton from a holder are described in detail in the following paragraphs. 14.2.2.3.1 Cross Draw This draw is used to bring the straight baton into a one-hand/vertical carry, one-hand/outside arm carry or other appropriate carry. With the baton in the holder on the weak-side, grasp the long portion of the straight baton with the weak hand. Push the baton up and forward of the holder while reaching across in front of the body with the strong hand. Grasp the grip portion with the strong hand (one-hand grip) and complete the drawing motion by bringing the baton across the body to the strong side. Assume a carry position and stance. Do not attempt to strike with a full arm extension of the strong arm. The cross draw is considered a high-profile drawing technique. 14.2.2.3.2 Strong Side Draw This draw is used to bring a baton into a one-hand/outside arm carry, one-hand/vertical carry, or other appropriate carry position. With the baton in the holder on the strong side, grasp the grip portion of the straight baton with the strong hand (one-hand grip or reverse grip, palm facing outward), then pull the baton out of the holder with the strong hand. Assume a carry position and stance based on the grip used. 14.2.2.3.3 Power Draw This draw is used when the baton is in the holder on the weak side and there is a need to strike a subject or create instantaneous distance without enough time to take the baton out using the cross draw or another draw. With the baton on the weak side, reach down with the weak hand and grasp the long portion of the baton, rotating it with the grip portion toward the ground. Simultaneously, grasp the grip portion with the strong hand ensuring proper grip and strike with the long portion of the baton using a reverse strike while pulling the baton out of the holder. (Refer to paragraph 14.2.3.2.)

14-3

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

14.2.2.3.4 Rear Draw This draw is used to achieve an element of surprise. With the baton on the weak side, reach down with the weak hand and grasp the long portion of the baton. Rotate the baton toward the rear with the short end pushed toward the rear of the weak side. Simultaneously, place the strong hand in the small of the back. The short portion of the baton should be pushed toward the strong hand, then pull the baton out of the holder and come to the vertical carry. After conducting the rear draw, come to the low-profile vertical carry. 14.2.3 Riot Baton Employment Techniques The riot baton is used defensively to block an aggressor or offensively to strike an aggressor. This section describes blocking and striking techniques in detail. 14.2.3.1 Riot Baton Blocks Blocking counters an intended blow or attack. The five basic types of blocks executed from the extended carry are described in the following paragraphs. Note All blocks are executed from the two-hand carry position. 14.2.3.1.1 High Block This block is effective in countering a downward, vertical threat directed at the top of the head and shoulders, typically from a club, pipe, or other similar object. Using the two-hand carry position, raise the baton up in front of the body until the long portion is in front of the forehead. The baton should be in a horizontal position above the head to absorb the shock of the blow. The fingers of the weak hand should be open and behind the long portion of the straight baton as the object is blocked. 14.2.3.1.2 Low Block This block is effective in countering an upward, vertical threat directed at the groin, lower abdomen, chest, or chin, typically from a foot, knee, or fist. Using the two-hand carry position, move the straight baton in a horizontal manner down in front of the body, just below the groin. The baton should remain in a horizontal position. The fingers of the weak hand should be open and behind the long portion of the baton as the threat is blocked. 14.2.3.1.3 Strong Side Block This block is effective in countering a horizontal threat directed at the strong side of the head or neck, chest, or hip area, typically from a foot, fist, elbow, or knee. Using the two-hand carry, move the baton in a vertical position toward the strong side. Keep the grip portion pointing straight down and the long portion pointing straight up. The fingers of the weak hand should be open and behind the long portion of the baton as the object is blocked. At the moment of contact with the striking object or threat, the long portion’s blocking surface should be at a right angle to the object or threat. 14.2.3.1.4 Weak Side Block This block is effective in countering a horizontal threat directed at the weak side of the head, neck, chest, or hip area, typically from a foot, fist, elbow, or knee. Using the two-hand carry position, move the baton in a vertical position toward the weak side. Keep the grip portion pointing straight down and the long portion pointing straight up. The fingers of the weak hand should be open and behind the long portion of the baton as the object is blocked. At the moment of contact with the striking object or threat, the long portion’s blocking surface should be at a right angle to the object or threat.

AUG 2003

14-4

14.3. horizontal threat may be from an attempted frontal or waist tackle. However.1. There are eight types of baton strikes. TYPE OF STRIKE Forward Strike Reverse Strike Strong Side Horizontal Strike Weak Side Horizontal Strike Front Jab Strike Rear Jab Strike Middle Strike Extended Strike ONE-HAND CARRY (OUTSIDE ARM OR VERTICAL CARRY) X X TWO-HAND CARRY (LONG GRIP) X X X X X X X Figure 14-3. In a horizontal motion. 3. chest. Using the vertical or outside arm carry. throat. as listed in Figure 14-3. The frontal. A detailed description of each strike is found in the following paragraphs. When the one-hand/forward strike is used in a vertical manner. In a vertical motion in front of the body to clear an opponent’s hand.NTRP 3-07.1 Forward Strike The one-hand grip/forward strike is a quick and effective strike that can be employed in three ways as a counter-strike to stop a hostile act: 1. or facial blow.3. move the baton toward the middle of the body in a 45-degree angle. Using the two-hand carry position.2 14.2. Keep the long portion pointing up and slightly forward of the downward pointing grip portion. In a downward diagonal motion intended to destabilize an opponent.3. The fingers of the weak hand should be open and behind the long portion of the straight baton as the object is blocked. keep the long portion straight up.2. horizontal threat directed at the face. 2. shove. 14. not angled forward.5 Middle Block This block is effective in countering a frontal. Strikes originate from two types of carries. or abdomen. quickly move the baton across the body from the strong to the weak side.2. Riot Baton Strikes and Origination Carries 14-5 AUG 2003 . the weak hand may have to grip the long portion while pushing a subject away or forcing a subject down to the ground during an attempted tackle.2.2.2 Riot Baton Strikes A strike is an attempt to hit an opponent.

In a downward diagonal motion to destabilize an opponent.3. Use both hands and the strong side hip to generate power. In a horizontal or downward diagonal strike delivery. Use a two-hand/long grip carry to rotate the baton in a horizontal motion. or rear pivot may enhance this technique. however. weak side/horizontal strike is a quick and effective follow-up technique to a two-hand/long grip/middle block or weak side block and is used as a counter-strike to stop a hostile act. or rear pivot may enhance this technique. the palm is face up.NTRP 3-07. Vertical motion in front of the body to clear an opponent’s hand.4 Weak Side Horizontal Strike The two-hand/long grip. not angled forward. Pull back with the weak hand as the strong hand drives the grip portion or grip end forward toward the target. This strike will not be executed from the extended carry.2. The driving thrust of the grip end or grip portion should be horizontal. the palm is toward the chest.2.3. Note • For the counter-strike to be effective.3 Strong Side Horizontal Strike The two-hand/long grip. forward pivot. Pull back with the strong hand as the weak hand drives the AUG 2003 14-6 . In a horizontal motion. strong side/horizontal strike is a quick and effective follow-up technique to a two-hand/long grip/middle block or a weak side block and is used as a counter-strike to stop a hostile act. 3. A pattern of movement such as a forward shuffle.2 This significantly reduces the chance of striking the opponent’s face or head.2. Note • • A pattern of movement such as a forward shuffle or pivot may enhance this technique. • 14. keep the long portion of the baton straight up.2. 14.2. follow through with the technique when it makes contact with the threat or is used to destabilize the person. • 14.2. strong side step. Note • For the counter-strike to be effective.2 Reverse Strike The one-hand grip/reverse strike is a quick and effective strike that can be employed in three ways as a counter-strike to stop a hostile act: 1. 2. forward pivot. strong side step. follow through with the technique when it makes contact with the threat or is used to destabilize the person. Use a two-hand/long grip carry to rotate the straight baton in a horizontal motion. When the one-hand/reverse strike is used in a vertical manner. In a vertical delivery. This strike may be executed from the extended carry. This significantly reduces the chance of striking an opponent’s face or head. freedom of movement and space is limited in a riot control formation. A pattern of movement such as a forward shuffle.2. This strike will not be executed from the extended carry.3.

14.2. Use a two-hand/long grip carry to thrust the grip end of the straight baton to the rear using both the strong and weak hands.3. however. 14-7 AUG 2003 .2.3.2. Note A pattern of movement such as a forward shuffle or pivot may enhance this technique. keeping the strong hand next to the body. 14. Look behind as the technique is delivered in order to properly select a target. 14. 14. The strong hand remains in place while the weak arm provides the momentum and driving force. Instructions for retaining the baton during a strike are found in the following paragraphs.6 Rear Jab Strike The two-hand/long grip/rear jab strike is a quick and effective technique to counter a bear hug from the rear.2 grip portion or grip end forward toward the target. The thrust should be horizontal.2.2. middle or strong side block.4 Riot Baton Retention The subject of a strike will possibly attempt to take the baton with one or two hands.3. Note A pattern of movement such as a forward shuffle may enhance this technique. The thrust should be horizontal or slightly downward. To execute the strike. whether the arms are free or pinned.2. Use a two-hand/long grip carry to thrust the long portion of the straight baton forward in a horizontal motion. using the entire body to generate the power. Note A pattern of movement such as a rear shuffle may enhance this technique.3. The intent is to strike with the underside of the baton on a vertical surface to dislodge hands on top of or on the side of a shield. This strike may be executed from the extended carry. Use both hands and the weak side hip to generate power. or as a means to destabilize an opponent by pushing them back and away. thrust the weak hand down in a slashing motion. The thrust should be horizontal or slightly downward. using both the strong and weak hands. It is essential that the striker retain the baton at all times.2. freedom of movement and space is limited in a riot control formation. The driving thrust of the grip end or grip portion should be horizontal.NTRP 3-07.2.2. Extend both arms at the end of the movement.2. Note • • A pattern of movement such as a forward shuffle or pivot may enhance this technique.5 Front Jab Strike The two-hand/long grip/front jab strike is quick and effective in stopping a frontal attack. 14. Use a two-hand/long grip carry to thrust the long end of the straight baton forward.7 Middle Strike The two-hand/long grip/middle strike is a quick and effective follow-up technique to a two-hand/long grip/weak side block.8 Extended Strike The extended strike is used in a riot control formation when space and movement are restricted due to spacing between control forces.

2. as the opponent grips the long portion of the baton with both hands. and take appropriate follow-up action as needed. create distance. and take appropriate follow-up action as needed. Once the long end is above the opponent’s hand or wrist. assess the situation. Simultaneously. rotate the baton in a circular motion to the outside of the gripping hand or wrist. quickly rotate the baton in a circular motion to the outside of the gripping hand or wrist.1 One. If the opponent’s hand is on the long end of the baton. using strength and body weight. If the opponent’s hands are on the long end of the baton. take a step to the outside of the attacker.or Two-Hand Grab Defense for Two-Hand Long Grip Carry This position is used whenever an opponent places one or both hands on the long portion of the straight baton.1 One-Hand Technique Using a two-hand/long grip carry.4. This technique is quick and effective when used in combination with strength.4.2 Two-Hand Technique Using the one-hand carry grip. drive the straight baton in a strong downward motion to completely separate their hold on the baton.2 14. Simultaneously.2 One. take a step to the outside of the attacker. rotate the baton in a circular motion to the outside of the gripping hands or wrists. using strength and body weight. using strength and body weight.2.2 Two-Hand Technique Using a two-hand/long grip carry. place the weak hand on the subject’s hands as though they were the long end of the baton and continue the movement. Following the release.2. take a step to the outside of the attacker. quickly grab the long end with the weak hand. 14. smooth body techniques. 14. Once the long portion is above the opponent’s hand or wrist. quickly grab the long end with the weak hand. Once the long end is above the opponent’s hands or wrists. create distance.1. 14.2. create distance. AUG 2003 14-8 . especially in a crowd. and body weight. as the opponent grips the long portion of the baton with one hand. drive the straight baton in a strong downward motion to completely separate their hold on the baton.2.NTRP 3-07. assess the situation.or Two-Hand Grab Defense for One-Hand Carry Grip This position is used whenever an opponent places one or both hands on the long portion of the baton. and body weight. drive the straight baton in a strong downward motion to completely separate their hold on the baton.4. Simultaneously.2. Once the long portion is above the opponent’s hand or wrist.1.4. 14.1 One-Hand Technique Using the one-hand carry grip. This technique is quick and effective when used in combination with strength.4. Using both hands. and take appropriate follow-up action as needed. drive the straight baton in a strong downward motion to completely separate their hold on the baton using strength and body weight. Using both hands. smooth body techniques. Following the release. Simultaneously. Following the release. create distance.2.2. place the weak hand on the opponent’s hand as though it was the long end of the baton and continue the movement. quickly rotate the baton in a circular motion to the outside of the gripping hand or wrist. assess the situation. assess the situation.4.2. take a step to the outside of the attacker. and take appropriate follow-up action as needed. Following the release. 14. Note Be alert to any attempt to grab control of the baton held in the strong hand.

the injury sustained will not be as great. upper lip. Results of controlling these joints are described in Figure 14-5. throat. and red target areas. Understanding how to properly strike an individual is important in justifying varying levels of force.2. elbows. hollow behind ear. However. will not cause death or serious bodily harm.2. upper abdominal region. upper arms. Red Figure 14-4. Yellow Moderate level of trauma to the body. However. 14. shin. upper and lower chest areas.5. when some yellow areas are used for controlling holds or restraint. Death or critical bodily injury. ears. • If the yellow portions of the body are struck with a baton. Head (eyes. but long-lasting due to extended healing time required. forearms. there are some red areas that.NTRP 3-07. as any pain or undue pressure results from the resisting efforts.5. spinal column. back of head). inside or outside of thigh.5 Riot Baton Physiological Considerations This section provides information regarding target areas of the body and potential injuries that may result from particular striking techniques. any muscle portions of the body.2. • 14. TARGET AREAS OF THE HUMAN BODY AND IMPACT RESULTS COLOR ASSIGNMENT Green BODY AREA EXAMPLES Foot. If any of the red areas are struck with a baton. nose. Note Color area assignments of the body will also vary according to whether or not the controlling force is restraining the individual or striking the individual with the baton. shoulder blades. Figure 14-4 describes each target area and the potential injuries resulting from impact. tailbone.2 14.1 Target Areas of the Human Body The human body is divided into green. knees. yellow. Collarbone.2. When restraining the body. instep. serious injury could occur.2 Six Hinges of the Human Body The joints or hinges of the human body can be manipulated for more effective control of an aggressive opponent. Target Areas of the Human Body and Impact Results 14-9 AUG 2003 . emphasis must be placed on locking out two of the three hinges on the upper body or two of the three hinges on the lower body. IMPACT RESULTS Least amount of trauma to the body. death or serious injury will occur. When joints are anatomically locked. groin area. when used for restraining only. an opponent is forced to comply.

OC spray is packaged in a hand-held canister. Oleoresin Capsicum is a mixture of the two. 14. Other products may have slight differences in nomenclature.3. depending on the manufacturer and the specifications required.1 Grip Methods for Proper Control of OC Spray Canister The two gripping methods for proper handling of OC spray canisters are described in the following paragraphs.3. Six Hinges of the Human Body 14.2. Apply pressure to knock an opponent off-balance or alter center of gravity. The knee can also be used as a hinge for pain compliance. Capsicum is extracted from the pepper plant. and Stance Methods of the OC Spray Canister To effectively use OC spray against an opponent. The seven components are listed in Figure 14-7.3 OLEORESIN CAPSICUM SPRAY Oleoresin Capsicum (OC) (also called capsaicin.3 Grip.2 SIX HINGES OF THE HUMAN BODY AREA Shoulder Elbow Wrist Hip Knee Ankle PROCEDURES Lock the shoulder to prevent the opponent from freely moving the upper portion of the body. 14. Note The above table contains nomenclature for the MK-9 canister. or pepper spray) is a skin and mucous membrane irritant. 14. as seen in Figure 14-6. This section provides information about the handling and use of OC spray. Figure 14-5. placing an opponent off-balance.NTRP 3-07. depending on the manufacturer.3. Apply pressure by grasping the ankle and turning it in a counterclockwise motion to lock the hinge out.1 Definition of OC Spray Oleoresin is a mixture of resin and an essential oil occurring naturally in various plants. Drawing. Lock out the hand by applying pressure at the break of the wrist and pushing the opponent’s thumb toward a stationary object (wall or the ground).3. 14. combined with correct stance. whose fruit and seeds range in pungency from mild to hot. The canister is pressurized by a gas or liquid propellant that allows long-range delivery of the agent to a target.3. Apply pressure by pushing outward on the knee. Apply pressure on the elbow or just above the elbow on the ulnar nerve to cause pain if the opponent resists. Apply pressure by twisting or locking out the wrist.2 Components of the OC Spray Canister Most OC spray canisters are typically divided into seven different components. it is essential that personnel understand how to correctly hold the canister and draw it from the holster. AUG 2003 14-10 . maximize the effective use of OC spray and minimize the risk of self-exposure. Correct methods of gripping and drawing. OC spray.

Figure 14-7. Plastic latch located on top of the actuator button.2 Safety Cover Nozzle SE LF DEFENSE MAGNUM MK-9 Canister Figure 14-6.NTRP 3-07. Regulates the amount of product delivered to the nozzle. OC Spray Canister Components 14-11 AUG 2003 . Delivery system to the valve assembly. Mechanism that activates the product. Holds the product. Hand-Held OC Canister OC SPRAY CANISTER COMPONENTS PART Nozzle Canister Safety Cover Actuator Button Valve Stem Valve Assembly Tube FUNCTION Dispenses the product from the canister according to the prescribed pattern.2. Connects the tube to the valve stem.

The user opens the holster with the weak hand. simultaneously draws the canister with the strong hand.3.2 MK-9 OC Canister Grip The canister is held in the weak hand. The strong hand grips the handle while the thumb is used to actuate the OC spray.3 Tactical Assist Draw The canister is worn on the strong or weak side of the body. A disadvantage to this hold is that the aggressor may be able to grab the canister and detach it from the handle. 14. The spray can be activated by either the thumb or index finger. The thumb is usually favored as it allows direct pressure downward on the actuator for quick and smooth release of the OC spray. Place the index finger under the nozzle guard.2 Drawing Methods When Employing OC Spray Canister There are three basic ways of drawing the OC spray canister from the holster.2 Cross Draw The canister is worn on the weak side of the body. 14.NTRP 3-07. Handle detachment results in release of the canister contents and contamination of the user as well as the attacker.1 Strong Side Draw The canister is worn on the strong side of the body.3.2. 14.3.3.3. 14. AUG 2003 14-12 . practice is recommended on each. 14. Two stances are described in the following paragraphs. 14.1 Hand-Held OC Canister Grip Grip the canister by making a “C-clamp” with the hand. Thumb actuation also allows the use of defensive and offensive hand-to-hand techniques. the user opens the top of the holster.3.2 14.3. removes the canister.3 Stance Methods When Employing OC Spray Canister Correct stance is essential to proper execution of grips and draws.2. The thumb is easily lifted from the actuator and placed back over the flip-top safety.3.3.1.3.3.2.2. Each method is acceptable. Improper grip of the MK-9 canister could result in injury to the user. With the strong hand. and assumes a ready position. Thumb actuation increases control of the spray unit by permitting rapid closure of the flip-top safety. Wrap the fingers securely around the canister and hold tightly against the strong side of the body. The fit of the thumb with the actuator is a key consideration in deciding to use the thumb actuation method. the user opens the top of the holster. and assumes a ready position. it is impractical to draw the OC spray canister with the weak hand. A weak side draw should not be used.3. however. With the strong hand.3. Extend the fingers firmly around the canister and keep them snugly together with the thumb over the safety cover until ready to dispense.3.1. removes the canister. Note As with a firearm or side handle baton. and assumes a ready position.

1 Hand-Held Fog/Cone OC Spray Patterns Hand-held fog/cone OC spray patterns disperse a large volume of microscopic droplets over a wide area making it easy to acquire the target. There are three basic spray patterns used by all manufacturers.4 OC Canister Spray Patterns The manner in which OC spray disperses after leaving the nozzle of the canister defines the spray pattern. The wide coverage limits the effective range to between 3 to 8 feet. and environment in which OC spray will be employed are determining factors for spray patterns. The weak hand is placed over the unit to conceal it from view.3.3.3. The thumb or forefinger is positioned above the flip-top safety to prevent accidental discharge. 14.NTRP 3-07. nozzle design. The ballistic stream is used for accuracy and to 14-13 AUG 2003 . The weak hand is palm-down on top of the strong wrist.4 Carries When Employing OC Spray The two carries described in the following paragraphs provide professional and low-profile methods to prepare to use OC spray. Do not extend the canister any further than 3 to 6 inches from the chest. nose. the spray covers the entire area around the subject’s eyes. keeping the thumb on the safety cap and the knuckles of the strong hand to the center of the buttocks. The volume dispersed by full cone patterns limits the number of spray bursts per canister. This stance presents a dominant and authoritative appearance and alerts others that OC spray is being used. Both elbows remain above the user’s duty belt. The arm holding the canister should not be fully extended.3. The weak hand is positioned with the fingertips lower than the cheekbone and either forward of or behind the nozzle. The thumb or forefinger is positioned above the flip-top safety to prevent accidental discharge.3. which is extended down the strong side. This stance presents a dominant and authoritative appearance allowing for easy transitions between weapons and provides a clearing or checking hand. 14.4. Do not extend the canister any further than 3 to 6 inches from the chest.3.1 Two-Hand Conceal Carry/Front Position The user assumes a stable position with the strong leg back. 14.3.2. The strong hand holds the canister in front of and close to the body.4.4.3.3.3. This carry presents a professional appearance and a low-profile approach and does not alert bystanders that OC spray is ready to be employed. 14. Environmental conditions such as wind are a limiting factor. The minimum spraying distance is 36 inches. The canister is held in the strong hand. concentrated stream that allows greater range in delivery. The type of canister.2 Low-Profile Carry The user assumes a stable position with the strong leg back.3. This carry presents a professional.2 14. The stream pattern focuses the contamination in a concentrated area.3. Figure 14-8 lists three spray patterns and the associated particulate size. 14.3. 14.4. Properly used. 14.2 Hand-Held Ballistic OC Stream Pattern Hand-held ballistic OC stream pattern is a powerful.3. The arm holding the canister should not be fully extended. and face. low-profile approach for the user and does not alert bystanders that OC spray is ready to be employed.2 One-Handed Stance The canister is held by the strong hand with the bottom over the user’s front foot. This carry is used to approach a subject from a concealed area.1 Two-Handed Stance The canister is held by the strong hand with the bottom over the user’s forward foot.3.

The recommended method of delivery is an isolated controlled motion from ear to ear. This pattern hits the subject with a splash or splatter effect. The residual product may become slippery on smooth surfaces. The recommended method of delivery is an isolated controlled motion in a circular pattern. schools. depending on distance. The three most effective ways to deliver OC spray are listed in Figure 14-9. foaming surfactant that coats the face upon contact.3. reduces cross-contamination.5.3 Jet Foam Patterns of OC Spray Jet foam OC spray pattern is a powerful. The minimum spraying distance is 6 feet. It is designed for climate-controlled environments such as courtrooms. hospitals. and is easier to see during low light conditions. Jet foam hits with greater impact.3.NTRP 3-07. It is designed for high-volume applications in sensitive ventilated enclosed environments such as hospitals and courtrooms. giving it an effective range of 3 to 12 feet. The minimum spraying distance is 36 inches. 14. 14. 14. making it excellent for crowd control. The recommended method of delivery is an isolated controlled motion from nose to mouth. and holding facilities.3. Containment should be in place to control multiple subjects who are visually impaired. 14. has better surface adhesion. 14.1 MK-9 Fog Delivery The MK-9 fog delivery is a full cone spray dispersal system designed to distribute a large quantity of OC spray into a vast area. Spray patterns determine the delivery technique.4. minimizing cross-contamination and respiratory effects.2 OC CANISTER SPRAY PATTERNS AND PARTICULATE SIZE SPRAY PATTERN Fog (Cone/Mist) Stream Foam CHARACTERISTICS Smallest particulate size Larger particulate size Most concentrated particulate size Figure 14-8.2. AUG 2003 14-14 . fast-acting. The MK-9 contains one pound of OC spray and offers extended ranges (6 to 15 feet) and multiple bursts. It contains one pound of OC spray with an effective range of 6 to 9 feet (in climate-controlled conditions) and is capable of multiple bursts. OC Canister Spray Patterns and Particulate Size reduce contamination of unintended targets. The following paragraphs describe four tactical application methods for OC spray. It has an effective range of 3 to 5 feet and a minimum spraying distance of 36 inches.3.3 MK-9 Foam Delivery The MK-9 foam delivery is a full cone spray dispersal system designed to distribute a large quantity of OC spray into a vast area.5. The minimum spraying distance is 6 feet. The OC particulate will not remain airborne as long as in a fog delivery and is designed to visually impair numerous subjects at distances of 6 to 15 feet.5. The minimum spraying distance is 6 feet.5 Delivery Techniques and Tactical Applications of OC Spray Delivery techniques are directional and define how OC spray is applied to the subject.3.2 MK-9 Stream Delivery The MK-9 stream delivery is a stream dispersal system capable of delivering large quantities of OC spray in a more controlled fashion than fog systems.

The possibility of the hydraulic needle effect has resulted in the establishment of minimum safe distances for each delivery system. Safety of the individual employing OC spray should never be compromised 14-15 AUG 2003 . The minimum spraying distance is 12 feet. such as with a fogger. which may remain airborne. Concerns have been raised about the possibility of soft tissue injury.2 Hydraulic Needle Effect of OC Spray The hydraulic needle effect is the consequence of the OC particulate penetrating the soft tissue of the eye.5.3. The recommended method of delivery is an isolated controlled motion from ear to ear. awareness of the target. heat and humidity also affect contamination hazards. Instances of hydraulic needle effect are rare. amount of product to use. A secure perimeter should be in place to control multiple subjects whose vision is impaired.3. The OC particulate will not remain airborne as long as it is in a fog delivery and is designed to visually impair numerous subjects at distances of 12 to 30 feet.1 General Employment Considerations of OC Spray Cross-contamination or transfer hazards are minimized with OC spray as the formulation is heavier than air and the vapor rate of OC spray is very low.2 DELIVERY TECHNIQUE Up and down Side to side Spiral motion PROCEDURE Spray in an isolated sweeping motion from the nose to the mouth. 14. cross-contamination. OC Spray Delivery Methods 14. It is an important factor to consider when employing OC spray and is due to the correlation between the distance and the amount of pressure (size of the canister) used in delivery. Vaporization occurs when a substance changes from a liquid to a gas state and should not be confused with very small droplets or particulate. Saturation of clothing may affect the respiratory system of the subjects without impairing their vision. Environmental factors such as wind and rain. and the process of employing OC spray from impact to recovery. fans or ventilation. 14.3. but should still be taken into consideration. 14.6 Employment Considerations of OC Spray Employing OC spray requires instruction in product handling and delivery.6. Caution must be exercised when using these delivery systems in small confined areas as they could possibly displace the oxygen supply.3. awareness of surroundings.4 MK-21/MK46 Riot Extinguishers The MK-21/MK46 riot extinguishers are dispersal systems capable of delivering large quantities of OC spray in a more controlled fashion than fog systems.NTRP 3-07. above the head. carcinogenic and inflammatory properties. Spray in a sweeping motion from ear to ear concentrating on the eyes. dividing the head in half.2. prolonged irritation. These airborne particulates may move across rooms or through ventilation systems and are most prevalent in fog delivery systems and spray nozzles that utilize conical spray patterns. The following paragraphs address these considerations in detail. minimizing cross-contamination and respiratory effects. Spray in a tight circular motion concentrating on the facial area. or possible infection.6. SPRAY PATTERN Fog Stream Foam Figure 14-9.

6. 5. 3. and brow).5 Target Area/Spray Volume of OC Spray The primary target when employing OC spray is the facial area.3. 14. Use code words for team communication that are not usually recognizable to the general public. The secondary target is the nose and mouth.6. The following guidelines are helpful in maintaining situational awareness when the decision to employ OC spray is made. forehead.3 Flammability and Carcinogenic Considerations Depending on whether a product is oil or water based. 3. 14. there is a specific requirement for solvents and emulsifiers to ensure even suspension of the capsaicin. Repeat steps 1 through 3 as required. Tactical situations determine the tactical responses. It is essential that an OC spray user remain aware of escalating aggression indicators in a hostile environment.4 Awareness Increased aggression prompts the use of nonlethal weapons. employ an ample amount of OC spray to ensure enough fluids are present to contaminate the eyes.” 3.6. 2. which assures coverage of the eye zone (eyes. Communicate with fellow troops when spraying a subject who is in the proximity of or in physical contact with other subjects. Physically control the opponent.6 Employment Procedure of OC Spray The following steps are required for effective and safe control of a subject during and after the use of OC spray.” 14. AUG 2003 14-16 . Evaluate opponent response.2. These ingredients make up the majority of the formulation and should be closely evaluated for their safety.3.2 by delaying the use of OC spray in tactical situations for the concern of a hydraulic needle effect. which can impair breathing. 14. Command the subject to get on the ground. 1.6.3. 1. Avoid pressure or weight on the back. 2. use as much agent as necessary to control the situation based upon the threat. In situations where the subject is hit in the facial area. such as “OC. Discharge OC spray into the facial area using as much as required and considering the following: 1. 2. 6. For multiple opponents.NTRP 3-07. Use the spray early with the element of surprise and prior to escalation of physical contact. End every command with “Do it now. Medically check the opponent and start decontamination if the situation allows. Spray the subject until contamination is achieved or it is evident that the OC spray is ineffective and other measures are necessary.3. Use a one-half to one second burst on the open eye. 4.

14. Psychological effects are of equal importance. Eyes remain closed due to the drying of the natural protective fluid of the eyes.3 Level 3 Level 3 contamination results from contact with an area contaminated with OC spray. 5.2. Moving in to control an aggressor who has just received a Level 1 contamination may result in a Level 2 contamination to the individual employing the OC spray. mucous membranes.2 14. A Level 2 contamination is the result of attempting to control or physically touch another person or item with a Level 1 contamination.3. 2. Instructors will emphasize that all subjects sprayed with OC will be kept under constant supervision to ensure their breathing is not impaired.8 Three Levels of Contamination There are three levels of contamination when handling or using any type of chemical. Positional asphyxiation of subjects exposed to OC spray can occur if they are placed in confined spaces or on their stomach with hands cuffed behind their back.3.7 Training Training will include the techniques for application of proper restraint (handcuffing or flexi-cuffing) of subjects exposed to OC spray to prevent possible positional asphyxiation. Physical and psychological effects are listed below: 14. Usually.1 Physical Effects 1. 14. 14. Shortness of breath. 14. Involuntary closure of the eyes resulting in temporary visual impairment. but not as obvious.3. Secretion of excessive mucus from the nose. The consumption of alcohol and/or cocaine may also contribute to positional asphyxiation of subjects sprayed with OC spray. contaminated skin and tissues.8. Training regarding the restraint of combative subjects will emphasize placing subjects in a sitting position or on their backs.1 Level 1 Level 1 contamination results from direct physical contact with OC spray.3.9. Burning sensation and inflammation of the eyes. The constricted position could result in respiratory distress/failure while under the effects of OC spray. 14-17 AUG 2003 . 14. a Level 3 contamination will occur when entering a contaminated zone or area. Involuntary extension of the hands to the facial area.2 Level 2 Level 2 contamination results from indirect or secondary contact with OC spray.NTRP 3-07. Each level will affect an individual differently.3. 3. It is essential that the OC spray user recognize and understand both. 6. 4.3. Instructors will conduct restraint training separate from OC spray exposure.9 Physical and Psychological Symptoms and Effectiveness of OC Spray The physical effects of OC spray contamination will be obvious to the user.8.8.3.

and after any physical confrontation. Verbally order the subject to the prone position with arms out to the side. Goal-oriented and mentally focused individuals may still accomplish their goal even though they cannot see and are experiencing significant discomfort. 5. or facial swelling should be evaluated by medical personnel without delay. which can affect normal breathing rhythms. Mind set may influence effectiveness. 14. b. a. all military personnel required to carry OC spray must receive a Level 1 contamination exposure during training. b. It is normal for an individual to experience fear before. especially subjects who are emotionally disturbed or prone to substance and/or alcohol abuse. While most allergic reactions are not life threatening. a. It is normal for an individual to experience increased anxiety when contaminated by OC spray for the first time. Allergic reaction. 14. palms up. Some individuals may have an anxiety attack. Any one who has never been contaminated with OC spray may display anxiety prior to contamination based on fear or knowledge of its effects. 4. Many failures are due to operator errors because of the lack of training or the improper use of an OC product.9. 14. Some individuals may panic and flee without thought for obstructions or trip hazards.NTRP 3-07. Handcuff or flexi-cuff the subject.2 7.” 2. 2.10 Procedures and Techniques in the Contaminated Environment of OC Spray Responsibilities of the OC spray users continue after the spray is delivered. Any subject who has been contaminated by an OC spray product who complains of itching. Because of this reason. face away. it is necessary to provide medical treatment to any subject believed to be having an allergic reaction.3 Effectiveness 1. hives. 3. and feet crossed.2 Psychological Effects 1. difficulty in swallowing.2. The failure rate of OC spray is difficult to quantify. AUG 2003 14-18 . during. OC spray has a varied reaction time between 1 and 5 seconds.3. but does exist. Procedures to secure and handle subjects in a contaminated environment are essential for maximum control and safety and are described in the following paragraphs.3. Some people have a very high threshold for pain.3.9. End each set of instructions with the command “Do it now. Note Personnel who have never been contaminated by OC spray may panic if they are accidentally contaminated during the employment of the OC spray. 1. 2.

use a decontamination aide to show initiative and compassion. The three major causes of sudden death while the subject is detained because of preexisting medical conditions or the enhanced effects of drugs are: (1) Lack of supervision. and First Aid from OC Spray It is important for the OC spray user to be aware of decontamination and subject recovery procedures. Monitor the subject for medical distress. Doing so will further restrict breathing that is already difficult due to OC spray contamination. OC spray users should be familiar with Sudden In-Custody Death Syndrome and potential risk factors. During transport. including first aid assistance. coherence. After the subject is restrained.2 3. Remove the subject from the contaminated area and establish a verbal rapport. periodically remind the subject to stay calm. b. Detention of the subject requires the following considerations: a. Assure the subject that the effects will dissipate shortly. 14. Tell the subject to breathe in through the mouth and out through the nose. 14-19 AUG 2003 . Hard lenses may be thoroughly cleansed. Fans or air conditioning units may be used. 5. If available. Face the subject into the wind for exposure to fresh air. 3. 6.10. Recovery.1 General Decontamination Procedures for Personnel 1. Restraint. 2. and respiration.1. (3) Improper and inaccurate written documentation. Do not press down on the subject’s back.3. Soft lenses should never be reused.3.10.2. 14. (2) Failing to provide immediate physical relief. Medical personnel should remove contact lenses. 4.NTRP 3-07. Sudden cessation of aggressive or agitated behavior by individuals under the influence of drugs or alcohol could signify the onset of medical distress.1 General Personnel Decontamination. In-custody handling requires the following restraint and transport considerations: a. The effectiveness of decontamination aids is considered to be minimal. c. Transport. b. begin decontamination as soon as practical.

Do not allow the subject to remove the lenses. 10. a. When a viable water source is available. apply immediate first aid decontamination. breathing. 5.1. particularly in fair-skinned persons who sunburn easily. AUG 2003 14-20 . b. before transport.2 4. Numerous applications may be required.1.3.2. Tell the subject to rapidly open and close the eyes (strobing). 3.3. 14.10. 9. Avoid salves and ointments until affected area has been completely decontaminated. 11. 6. Open the airway.2 Recovery Time for Personnel 1. OC formulations. especially hard contact lenses. salves. 14. and circulation. b. Any person who exhibits sunburn-like redness more than one hour after being decontaminated or who shows any evidence of blistering (second-degree burns) after being sprayed should receive medical treatment for burns. Once a subject has been restrained after being sprayed. Check for signs of responsiveness. Use of a wet paper towel pressed on the face followed by a dry paper towel has proven to be the most effective way to remove the resin from the skin. The eyes should be able to open within 20 to 30 minutes. Encourage the subject to force open the eyes in order to flush out the OC product. If possible. 8. a. the user should conduct a primary medical survey: airway. c. which exceed 0.10. Difficulty removing contact lenses may cause abrasions to the cornea or sclera (the white part of the eye). Have subjects remove contaminated clothing (mission dictating).NTRP 3-07. 2. Anyone not exhibiting significant improvement after one hour should be closely monitored to ensure continued recovery. Do not use any creams.60 percent capsaicin.3 First Aid for Personnel 1. Do not allow the subject to rub eyes. 2. Usually an individual will recover within one hour with vast improvements. Do not use any commercial eyewash during the decontamination process. 7. or oils. Unqualified (nonmedical) personnel should not remove contact lenses. Check for signs of obstruction in the mouth. have the subject flush the eyes with copious amounts of cool water. increase the potential for burns.

14-21 AUG 2003 .2 4. 3.3. 14. Medical personnel should evaluate any person who admits a history of heart problems.NTRP 3-07. With normal ventilation or by using high-speed fans. 2. diabetes. buildings. Medical personnel should evaluate any person who admits to being under the influence of any drugs or alcohol immediately. 6. Wash ingredient down drains. rooms. or any other potentially serious medical condition. 5. Three methods for removal of the contaminant are: 1.2 General Area Decontamination OC spray is biodegradable and does not require special equipment or processes for decontamination. lung problems.10. and vehicles can be decontaminated in approximately 1 hour. No person who has been contaminated by OC spray or any other chemical agent should be left unsupervised for at least two hours after contamination. Blot exposed surfaces clean with damp rag and non-oil-based soap. high blood pressure.2. Launder clothing as normal with other clothing.

NTRP 3-07.2.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 14-22 .

2 CHAPTER 15 Simunitions 15. the appearance of the weapon is very similar to that of the service weapon. small-arms training system developed for the M16 (series) of weapons and for the M9 pistol.2 Description of Barrel Assembly The training barrel is uniquely designed to chamber and fire the marking cartridge. Descriptive and ballistic data for the M9 marking cartridge are summarized in Figure 15-2. small pistol primer in combination with approximately one third of a grain of propellant. the identification statement “9mm Marking CTG Only. permit the safe and reliable firing of the marking cartridge. On the converted M9. 15-1 AUG 2003 . which are nonlethal. No STD Ammo” is etched on every training barrel such that it can be seen at all times. The marking cartridge is powered by a standard. protection of dignitaries. The adapter kits change the operating mode of the converted weapon from gas-operated to straight blowback. Hits. the training barrel is colored blue between the front sight and the flash suppressor. In addition to coloring the training barrel. After the adapter kit is installed.62mm thin-walled plastic projectile containing marking compound. force-on-force training system. 15. Weapon cycling occurs because the brass cartridge case is free to slide rearwards over the sabot during firing. In order to identify a converted M16 (series) rifle. The simunition system consists of reduced-energy marking cartridges and adapter kits that.3 Performance Characteristics Descriptive and ballistic data for the M16 (series) rifle adapter kit are summarized in Figure 15-1.1. the entire barrel is colored blue.1. This small amount of propellant ensures a reduced-energy charge in the cartridge. when installed on the standard weapon.1 DESCRIPTION Simunitions refers to a nonlethal. 15. are denoted by red or blue marks. Do not fire standard rounds with the adapter kit installed.NTRP 3-07. the weapon can fire marking cartridges. Marking cartridges.1 Description of Marking Cartridge Once adapted for training. make up an effective close-range. The simunition system enhances the realism and training value of interactive tactical training and allows trainees to use their service weapons in a representative manner in exercises simulating a variety of scenarios including counterterrorism. close-quarters combat. urban fighting.1. and a 7. a plastic sabot. resulting in a straight blowback action.2. trench clearing and fighting in wooded areas. These cartridges consist of a modified 9mm case. when used with the adapter kit. either red or blue in marking color. 15. Visually inspect all ammunition prior to loading weapon to make sure that only subcaliber 9mm marking cartridges are loaded.

0 inches (10-round group) Bruises or welts on unprotected skin Greater than 80 yards — accuracy not assured due to sensitivity to cross winds 0. Adapter Kit Specifications for M16 (Series) Rifle ADAPTER KIT SPECIFICATIONS FOR M9 SERVICE PISTOL CHARACTERISTIC Firing Modes Magazine Capacity Operational Temperature Range (conditioned cartridges) Velocity at 15 Feet (70 °F) Accuracy at 15 Feet (indoors) Terminal Effects Maximum Range Projectile Weight Semiautomatic 15 rounds per training magazine 32 °F to 105 °F Less than 550 feet/second Mean radius no more than 3. Adapter Kit Specifications for M9 Service Pistol AUG 2003 15-2 .NTRP 3-07.0 inches (10-round group) Bruises or welts on unprotected skin Greater than 100 yards — accuracy not assured due to sensitivity to cross winds 0.5 gram Figure 15-1. Burst 20 rounds per training magazine 32 °F to 105 °F Greater than 700 rounds/min (full automatic) Less than 550 feet/sec Mean radius no more than 3.5 gram PERFORMANCE Figure 15-2. Semiautomatic.2 ADAPTER KIT SPECIFICATIONS FOR M16 (SERIES) RIFLE CHARACTERISTIC Firing Modes Magazine Capacity Operational Temperature Range (conditioned cartridges) Cyclic Rate of Fire at 70 °F Velocity at 15 Feet (70 °F) Accuracy at 15 Feet (indoors) Terminal Effects Maximum Range Projectile Weight PERFORMANCE Automatic.2.

3. 15. The plastic of the protective mask becomes brittle in cold temperatures and could crack or break.NTRP 3-07.1 M16 (Series) Rifle Adapter Kit Major Components The major components of the M16 adapter kit are described in Figure 15-3. When training. full-face protection is mandatory.2 SAFETY The design of the adapter kit helps preclude the inadvertent chambering of live ammunition. towel. This protection zone shall remain clear of unprotected personnel and have controlled access. or neck scarf will be worn so as not to expose any portion of the neck and throat. the plastic projectile that houses the soap-based dye begins to harden at temperatures below 38 °F resulting in the round losing the “marking effect. • • Only face masks approved by the Navy Weapon System Explosive Safety Review Board are authorized for use. The three subcomponents of the training upper receiver barrel assembly are further described in Figure 15-4. 2.2 15. and neck protection. 15. face.” A 150-meter safety zone should be established and strictly enforced during training evolutions. 15-3 AUG 2003 . A balaclava. Force-on-force simunitions training at temperatures below 38 °F is prohibited. Neck protection. Additionally.3 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE APPLICATION The simunition adapter kit for 5.2. Head. providing users with an additional safeguard in training environments. at a minimum. A safety officer must inspect the training area and all participants to ensure there is no live ammunition in the training area prior to the commencement of training exercises or scenarios.56mm weapons includes the M16 (series) rifle and the M4A1 carbine. Also ensure that a minimum safe engagement distance of five feet from the muzzle is established and maintained. Throat and groin protection are also strongly recommended. Body protection. the following protective equipment and clothing: 1. Ensure all personnel within the 150-meter safety distance (zone) wear. 3.

3. AUG 2003 15-4 . Clear plastic training magazine. or loosened.1 Loading of Magazines 1. Figure 15-3.3. When loading. Carefully slide the cartridge being loaded to the rear of the magazine. Ensure that no pressure is put on the projectile portion of previously loaded cartridges.2 Converted M16 (Series) Rifle Loading It is important to carefully handle marking cartridges to ensure the projectile does not fracture or become skewed in the sabot. Fractured. Examine marking cartridges and ensure each projectile is unfractured and secure in the sabot. The projectile of the previous cartridge may become fractured. or loosened projectiles are the primary causes of weapon stoppages. 15. and a training bolt assembly.3.2 M16 (SERIES) RIFLE ADAPTER KIT MAJOR COMPONENTS COMPONENT Training Upper Receiver Barrel Assembly Training Buffer Assembly Training Magazines FUNCTION Consists of a standard upper receiver assembly. Load 20 marking cartridges into the training magazine.2.NTRP 3-07. M16 (Series) Rifle Adapter Kit Major Components 15. be careful that the metal case of the cartridge being loaded does not seat on the sabot portion of the previous cartridge. Consistent application of the following procedure will improve the performance of the marking cartridge by minimizing misfires related to marking cartridge defects. Training buffer assembly is colored blue except for plastic bumper to distinguish it from a standard buffer assembly. 2. skewed.2. a training barrel assembly. skewed. Same size and shape as a standard buffer assembly.

the barrel bore is canted upwards from the chamber to the muzzle to maintain aiming accuracy. 15. loosen. a training ejector (attached to the training barrel). Consistent application of the following procedure will improve the performance of the marking cartridge by minimizing misfires related to marking cartridge defects.3. and a charging handle assembly. or become skewed in the sabot.2 TRAINING UPPER RECEIVER BARREL ASSEMBLY SUBCOMPONENTS COMPONENT Upper Receiver Assembly Training Barrel Assembly FUNCTION Consists of a standard upper receiver with target-style rear sight assembly. a standard hand guard cap. the adapted weapon is ready for firing.2 Converted M9 Pistol Loading The standard M9 magazine is used with the converted M9 pistol. Training Upper Receiver Barrel Assembly Subcomponents 15.4. a standard barrel nut assembly. a standard firing pin assembly. and a training flash suppressor.5 lbs.4.2.4 M9 PISTOL The simunition adapter kit for the M9 pistol permits the safe and reliable firing of marking cartridges for training purposes. and a standard extractor assembly. 15-5 AUG 2003 . The training barrel is blue and weighs 0. in combination with the low muzzle velocity of the projectile.2 Magazine Insertion After inserting a magazine loaded with marking cartridges into the magazine well of the lower receiver. It is important to carefully handle marking cartridges to ensure the projectile does not fracture. a training bolt guide. The barrel bore is off-center at the muzzle. Shooting should not begin until all relevant safety measures for training with marking cartridges have been observed and the training exercise or scenario has been fully explained by the instructor and completely understood by the trainees. Consists of a training bolt. a forward assist button. Due to the small amount of propellant in a marking cartridge. an ejection port cover. Training Bolt Assembly Figure 15-4.NTRP 3-07. 15. All appropriate range and training rules and regulations for shooting must be observed.1 M9 Pistol Adapter Kit Components The M9 pistol adapter kit includes one training barrel. a standard front sight. 15. Consists of a training barrel (colored blue between the front sight and the flash suppressor). the barrel and slide are unlocked to ensure reliable functioning of the weapon.2. To compensate for this.

The projectile of the previous cartridge may become fractured.5.4. M16 (series) rifle. Load 15 or fewer marking cartridges into the magazine.5 GENERAL OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Operating instructions for adapted weapons are generally the same when firing marking cartridges as when firing standard live service ammunition.1 Temperature Limitations After a weapon has been adapted to fire a marking cartridge. 2.5. skewed. There is not enough energy in the marking cartridges to penetrate the cap and then perform according to specifications.2. be careful that the metal case of the cartridge being loaded does not seat on the sabot portion of the previous cartridge. the converted M9 pistol is ready for firing.1 Loading of Magazines 1. 3. or loosened. M9 service pistol and Chapter 6. Examine marking cartridges and ensure each projectile is unfractured and secure in the sabot.2 Dusty and Sandy Areas (M16 (Series) Rifle Only) When firing the converted M16 (series) rifle in dusty or sandy areas.2 15. Differences due to installation of the adapter kit and the use of marking cartridges are described below. The recommended operating temperature range is from 32 °F to 105 °F. the standard protective barrel cap must be removed. Fractured. or loosened projectiles are the primary causes of weapon stoppages.2. Shooting should not begin until all relevant safety measures for training with marking cartridges have been observed and the training exercise or scenario has been fully explained by the instructor and completely understood by the trainees.NTRP 3-07. Carefully slide the cartridge being loaded to the rear of the magazine.4. 15. These instructions are described in Chapter 2. All appropriate range and training rules and regulations for shooting must be observed. skewed. 15. 15.2 Magazine Insertion After inserting a magazine loaded with marking cartridges into the magazine well of the pistol grip. When loading. AUG 2003 15-6 . 15. No protective barrel cap is provided with the adapter kit. it should not be used under conditions of extreme cold or extreme heat.2.

remove the adapter kit components. and inspect the chamber to ensure no ammunition is chambered. When removing the adapter kit components from the M16 (series) rifle. Always keep the muzzle pointed in a safe direction.NTRP 3-07. place the weapon on safe.3 Barrel Cleaning It is recommended that the M16 (series) rifle barrel be cleaned after firing 80 rounds and the M9 barrel be cleaned after firing 70 rounds. remove the magazine (if installed).5. ensure the training buffer assembly is removed from the lower receiver buttstock assembly.2 15.6 KIT REMOVAL Prior to kit removal. 15-7 AUG 2003 .2. 15. and reinstall the standard components. Follow standard disassembly procedures.

NTRP 3-07.2.2 INTENTIONALLY BLANK AUG 2003 15-8 .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 On the range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Issue to/recovery from armory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 M14 rifle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 INDEX Page No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Clearing barrel . . . . . . C Clearing barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Safe weapon handling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 G General weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . 5-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . 5-11 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and reloading . . . . 1-2 Guard mount procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Safe weapon movement procedures . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Weapon handling commands . . . 3-1 Associated components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Clearing barrel . . . 5-3 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Remedial action . . 1-2 M M11 service pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . holstering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Index-1 AUG 2003 . . . 3-19 Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Safe weapon movement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Procedures to present . . . . . . 3-13 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Remedial action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Weapon handling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 M16 (series) rifle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Safety features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Characteristics . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . 10-2 Cycle of operation . . . 11-10 Range card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 M203 grenade launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 caliber heavy machine gun . . . . 11-8 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Weapon handling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Page No.NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 Function. . . . . . . . 7-11 M240 (series) medium machine gun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Remedial actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . 6-8 Safe weapon movement procedures . . 6-17 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Weapon handling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . 11-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 M60 (series) medium machine gun . 7-11 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 AUG 2003 Index-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . 7-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Remedial actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Components. . . . . . . . . . 6-12 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Remedial action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . 7-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clearing barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 Weapon handling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4 Safe weapon movement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . 10-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 M79 grenade launcher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Cycle of operation . . . . 2-21 Drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Shooting fundamentals . 8-10 M9 service pistol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Remedial actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . and reloading . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Page No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 MK19 MOD 3 40mm grenade machine gun. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Function . . . 2-10 Remedial action . . . . 2-4 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Safety features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Safe weapon movement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Procedures to present . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . 2-2 Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Safe weapon movement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Associated components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 MK 3A2 concussion grenade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Weapon handling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Function. . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Safe weapon handling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . holstering. . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 Index-3 AUG 2003 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Safe handling procedures . . . . . . . 12-12 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Major components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Cycle of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Description . . . . . Employment considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Remedial action procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Kit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Simunitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NTRP 3-07. . . . . 12-12 Weapon condition codes . . . . . . . . 4-1 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Definition . . .2 Page No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10 Mossberg 500 shotgun . . . . . . . . . . . . and draws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Function. Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Disassembly/assembly and function check . . . . . . . . . . . . Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grip. . . . . . . Spray patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Clearing barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Employment techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . grips. . . . . . . . . Definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-10 14-10 14-17 14-10 14-15 14-10 14-12 14-13 14-17 R Riot baton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 O Oleoresin Capsicum spray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Carries. . . . . . 4-5 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Universal weapons safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 AUG 2003 Index-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12 Safe operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Safe weapon movement procedures . . . 14-1 14-2 14-2 14-4 14-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 N Nonlethal weapons . . . . . . . . . . . . and stance methods MK-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Shooting fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-7 M16 (series) rifle application. . . . . . . . 12-10 Weapon handling commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Issue to/recovery from the armory . . . . . . . . . . . . Physiological considerations. .

NTRP 3-07.2.2

Page No. M9 pistol . . . . . . . . . . Performance characteristics Safety . . . . . . . . . . . Temperature limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 15-1 15-3 15-6

W Weapon handling commands. Weapons . . . . . . . . . . . Controls . . . . . . . . . . Procedures . . . . . . . . Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1

Index-5

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

AUG 2003

Index-6

NTRP 3-07.2.2

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES Effective Pages AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 AUG 2003 Page Numbers 1 thru 34 1-1 thru 1-4 2-1 thru 2-22 3-1 thru 3-20 4-1 thru 4-16 5-1 thru 5-16 6-1 thru 6-18 7-1 thru 7-12 8-1 thru 8-10 9-1 thru 9-12 10-1 thru 10-12 11-1 thru 11-10 12-1 thru 12-12 13-1 thru 13-6 14-1 thru 14-22 15-1 thru 15-8 Index-1 thru Index-6 LEP-1, LEP-2

LEP-1

AUG 2003

NTRP 3-07.2.2

INTENTIONALLY BLANK

AUG 2003

LEP-2

.

2.2 .NTRP 3-07.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful